Metric Tutorials - Autodesk

Revit Structure 2009
Metric Tutorials
April 2008
© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not
be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC,
AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk
Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine,
Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification,
Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's
Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World
(design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the
Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT,
Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder,
Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk
Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit,
Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction,
Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP,
Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits

ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another
disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL
German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin.
Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved.
Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™.
WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock®
AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved.
The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for
Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and
used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).
Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No.
5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.
OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.
OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.
OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights
reserved.
RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.
Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff
portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including,
but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the
copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential
damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption)
however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in
any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell
this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this
permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics
may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and
Silicon Graphics.
Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and
to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this
permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
Government Use
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Contents
Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Adding Shaft Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exploring the Reinforcement Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Placing Stirrup Rebar (Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Placing Rebar (Perpendicular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Setting the Rebar Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating and Viewing a Rebar Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Adding a Tag to the Rebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
v
Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . 93
Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Changing the Beam System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
vi | Contents
Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Importing Details from the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Chapter 8 Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Chapter 9 Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Working with Alignments and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Contents | vii
Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Chapter 12 Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Chapter 13 Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . 500
Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
viii | Contents
Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Chapter 18 Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Creating the Structural Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Creating the Roof System Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Chapter 21 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Chapter 23 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Contents | ix
Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Chapter 24 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
x | Contents
Understanding the
Concepts 1
In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the
terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.
This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the
product, including:
■ how Revit Structure works.

■ the terms used when working with the product.
■ how to navigate the user interface.
■ how to perform some common tasks in the product.
Using the Tutorials

In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files
and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file.
1
The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title
for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.
NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit
Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit
Structure.
Accessing Training Files

Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with
the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save
them.
Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST
2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:
■ Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric
units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.
■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
■ Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.
NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD
manager for more information.
IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training
files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the
tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.
What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model
that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references
the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather
than opening an existing training file.
Open a training file
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training
file.
2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open.
Save a training file
5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As.
In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point
for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save
the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson.
6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

■ For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note
where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.
■ For File name, enter the new file name.

A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.
For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a
new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.
■ For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.
Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File
menu ➤ New ➤ Project.
8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project.

9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.
Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates.
11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates.
Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure
type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as
necessary.
12 Select Structural Analysis-DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open.

13 Click OK.
Understanding the Basics

In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your
work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology,
the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in
the product.
What is Autodesk Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that
supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling
(BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it.
In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of
information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule
views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information
across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically
coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.
What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination
and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically
by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics
that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is
parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure:
Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through
the entire project.
The following are examples of these element relationships:
■ Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the
relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional
characteristic.
■ The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof
remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.
How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate

changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links.
When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and
reflects that change to any affected elements.
Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing
of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant
to your design.
Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:
■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the
model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements.
■ Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes
are datum elements.
■ View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or
document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.
There are 2 types of model elements:

■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls
and roofs are hosts.
■ Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams,
structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.
There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For
example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements.
■ Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include
detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.
This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created
and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric
elements in Revit Structure.
In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The
context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established
with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what
you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning
2 walls, for example.
Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar
to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms
is crucial to understanding the software.
Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building
information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to
construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project,
and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the
design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules,
and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.
Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs,
slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create
a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall,
or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure
Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit
Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types.
Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For
example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements
include tags and text notes.
Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of
parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family
may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is
the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose
the family come in different sizes and materials.
Families are either component families or system families:
■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine
the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
■ System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating
as separate files.
■ Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
■ You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.
For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create
different types of walls with different compositions.
■ System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block.
A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions.
Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific
locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).
Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface

One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit
Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy
to understand what each button represents. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions.
If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, you will soon feel comfortable learning
this interface.
In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become
familiar with the user interface.
Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.
The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of
the project and the view that is currently open.
Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition,
the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view.
TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well.
The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.
The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit,
and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking.
You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have
shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command
on the menu.
TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF.
While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command.
Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and
right-click. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what
is currently selected.
The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.
There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on
the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of
the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You
can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Wall.

Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall.
The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component.
6 On the Design Bar, click Beam.

Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. On the
left side of the Options Bar, notice a beam type is specified.
The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the
drop-down list to view the list of beams.
The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Beam tool, the Type
Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. The list of components in the Type
Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under
the respective category.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Column.

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of columns that are available.
You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it
to the structural model. For example, if you intend to add a beam, the beam type active in the
Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. You
can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the
structural model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the
type using the Type Selector.
The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars.

The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector.
There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control
which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box.
11 Click OK.
Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar.
■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components
■ View tab — commands for creating different views in the project
■ Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project
■ Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details
for the project construction documents
■ Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images
■ Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans
■ Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands
■ Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements
■ Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information
To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed
on the Design Bar.
TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting
the tab from the context menu.

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families,
and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename
views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural
plans, elevations, 3D), family category (beams, columns, walls), and group name. You can expand
or compress the browser list by clicking the + or - sign next to the name. To open a view,
double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area,
making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is
also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title
bar to a new location.
13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser.
14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.

You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets.
After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within
the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector.
15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Wall.

The cursor is displayed as a pencil.
17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.
In the bottom left corner of the window, notice the Status Bar provides information regarding
what you should do next. In this case, it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point."
TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. The Status Bar also
provides information, in conjunction with tooltips, regarding selected components within a
view. When you place the cursor over a component, it highlights and the status bar displays
the component name.
TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view, use the Tab key
to alternate between nearby components.
19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area.
The elevation symbol consists of two parts, the main symbol and the elevation directional
arrows. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is
highlighted.
In the Status Bar, notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building
Elevation.
20 Press TAB, and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol.
Revit Structure Help
21 Click Help menu ➤ Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 Help.

Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. You can use this tri-pane,
HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. There are
several tools that help you find information. You can select a topic on the Contents tab, find a
keyword on the Index tab, search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab, or save
commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide
instant help on any menu command.
You can access Help in the following ways:
■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. Click the Help button, and the topic specific to the
dialog opens. If there is no Help button displayed, press F1 to get help on that dialog.
■ Windows: From any window, press SHIFT+F1, and click to get the topic associated with the
window.
■ Toolbar: From the Toolbar, click , and then click on a specific menu command or
command button for Help. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar
displayed.
■ Tooltips: To see tooltips, rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays.
TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu.
22 Close the Revit Structure Help window.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure
In this exercise, you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the
tutorials. After you are familiar with these tasks, it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the
lessons of each tutorial.
Use zoom commands to adjust the view

There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps, you open a training file and practice
adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.
In the tutorials, you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For
example, you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or
plan view in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural
model in the window.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing.rvt.
3 In the Project Browser, click 3DViews ➤ 3D.
The 3D isometric view displays:
4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu.

The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys.
Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15

5 Click Zoom Out (2x).
In the drawing area, the view zooms out from the structural model.
6 On the View toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the
zoom options.
NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command.
7 Click Zoom To Fit.

The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window.
8 Click in the drawing area, and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.
9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify; this is referred to
as a crossing selection.
When you release the mouse button, the view zooms in on the selected area.
10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button, you can roll the wheel to zoom the
view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom
out.
NOTE As you zoom in and out, Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less
than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation
tools.
11 To display SteeringWheels, on the View toolbar, click .

The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.
As you move the mouse, the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.
12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.
13 Click and hold the mouse button.
The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.
14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.
You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button, moving the wheel to the desired
location, and then using the Zoom tool again.
For more information about SteeringWheels, click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation
wheel, and click Help. To define settings for SteeringWheels, click Settings menu ➤ Options,
and click the SteeringWheels tab.
16 To exit the wheel, press ESC.

Undo commands
17 On the Standard toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).

All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to reverse the
effects of one or more commands. In this example, you decide that you prefer the table in its
original position.
Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17

18 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up
to and including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original
locations.
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or
press CTRL+Z.
End a command
19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.

Some commands, such as the Lines command, stay active or current until you choose another
command or end the current command.
20 Click in the drawing area to start the line, and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines.
21 To end the command, use one of the following methods:

■ Choose another command.
■ On the Design Bar, click Modify.
■ Press ESC twice.
22 Close the file without saving your changes.

Express Workshops
2
The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 functionality, highlighting
powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you
can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. When you finish these tutorials, you will have a basic
understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. You will also learn some of the practices that
can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project.
Structural Modelling
In this lesson, you create a 5-story concrete structure, using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure.
You start by importing a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a
background template for grid and column locations. You then add structural walls, columns, beams, beam
systems, and a concrete slab to the model. Finally, you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model.
19
Creating a New Project
In this first exercise, you will create and name a new concrete project.
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

2 In the New Project dialog, click Browse.
3 In the Choose Template dialog, select Structural Analysis-Default Metric.rte, in the Metric
Templates folder, and click Open.
4 In the New Project dialog, click OK.
Save the new project
5 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

6 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the new project as m_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt.
This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial.
7 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding New Levels on page 20.
Adding New Levels

In this exercise, you create additional levels for your structure.
Training File
Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, m_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt.
Add levels
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South.
2 Click the value (3000.0) for the Level 2 elevation, enter 3500 mm, and press ENTER.
3 Create additional levels as follows:

■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Level.
■ On the Options Bar, click (Pick Lines), and enter 3500 mm for Offset.
■ In the drawing area, click the Level 2 reference line; when a dashed line displays, click to
create Level 3.
20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 Repeat the previous step to create 3 new levels (Level 4, Level 5, and Level 6), each with the
level offset set to 3500mm.
5 Press ESC twice to exit the Level command.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save.
7 Proceed to the next exercise, Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21.
Importing/Linking a DWG File

In this exercise, you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a
background for creating your structure.
Training File
Import/Link an architectural file
1 In the Project Browser, select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2.

Notice that Level 2 is bold. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.
Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21

2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.
3 In the Import/Link dialog, do the following:
■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog, click Training Files, and select
Metric\m_RST_EW_Arch_Floor_Plan.dwg
■ Select Orient to View and Link.
■ For Colors, select Preserve.
■ For Positioning, select Auto - Center to Center.
■ Click Open.
The architectural drawing opens in the drawing area.
Reposition elevation symbols
4 On the View toolbar, click (Zoom In), and draw a zoom box around the West elevation
symbol as shown.
5 Click the elevation symbol, drag it beyond the grid bubbles, and click to place the symbol.

6 Use the same method to relocate the East elevation symbol.
Hide elements in the imported drawing
7 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the grid.
8 Select the imported drawing, and on the Options Bar, click Query.
9 In the drawing area, select a grid line, and in the Import Instance Query dialog, click Hide in
View.
Notice that all grid lines disappear.
10 On the Toolbar, (Undo).

12 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Column Grids on page 24.

Adding Column Grids
In this exercise, you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal
grids.
Training File
Place vertical grids

2 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit).
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Grid.
4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 Select the first vertical grid line.
Notice that the grid line is highlighted, and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble.
6 Scroll to the bottom of the drawing, and select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line
1.
Notice that it is labeled 2.

7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines, moving from left to right, and using the zoom controls
as needed.
As you select subsequent grid lines, labels appear in numerical sequence.
NOTE When you select a grid line, the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. Click
the check box above the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. Make sure that all
the grid bubbles are located at the top of the drawing.
The last vertical grid line is labeled 18.

Place horizontal grids

11 Select the first horizontal grid line.
Notice that it is labeled as grid 19.
12 Click the value within the grid bubble, enter A, and press ENTER.
Adding Column Grids | 25

13 Select the next grid line below grid A.
Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical.
14 Select the remaining horizontal grids. The bottom grid should be grid M.

Modify grid bubbles
16 Enter ZF.
17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, do the following:
■ Click the Imported Categories tab.
■ Under Visibility, clear the m_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan.dwg file.
■ Click Apply, and then OK.

The imported drawing no longer displays in the drawing area.

19 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around grid bubbles 2 and 3.
Notice that both grid lines have an elbow.
20 Modify grid lines 2 and 3 as follows:

■ Select the grid line.
■ Click the elbow symbol that is located on the grid line.
■ Move the grid line so that the bubble is angled.
21 Using the same method, modify grid bubbles 16 and 17.

■ Under Visibility, select the m_RST_EW_Arch_Floor_Plan.dwg file.

The imported drawing is displayed in the drawing area.

25 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Structural Columns on page 27.
Adding Structural Columns

In this exercise, you add columns at specific grid intersections. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level
2.
Adding Structural Columns | 27

Training File
Setup views

2 Enter ZF.
For the remainder of this tutorial, this view is referred to as the plan view.
3 On the View toolbar, click (3D).

For the remainder of this tutorial, this view is referred to as 3D view.

4 Click inside the 3D view, and on the View Control Bar, do the following:
■ For Detail Level, select Fine.
■ For Model Graphic Style, select Shading with Edges.
5 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area.
6 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally.
Place columns at specific grid intersections
7 Click inside the plan view.

8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Columns.
9 In the Type Selector, select M_Concrete-Rectangular-Column: 450 x 600mm.
10 Click the plan view, and place a concrete column at grid location A1.
Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is aligned with the column location on the
drawing.
Notice that the column is also displayed in the 3D view.

11 Using the same method, place a column at the following grid locations:
■ A3
■ J2, K4
■ B10, E10, I10, M10
■ I12, M12
■ B14, E14, I14, M14
■ C16, I16
■ H18
12 On the Design Bar, Click Modify.

13 Click inside the 3D view.
14 Enter ZF .

16 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Structural Walls on page 30.
Adding Structural Walls

In this exercise, you add structural walls around the elevator shafts and at specific load bearing locations on
the grid.

Training File
Place the first structural wall

2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Wall.

4 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Generic - 300mm.
5 On the Options Bar, for Loc Line, select Finish Face: Interior.
6 Using the drawing as a guide, click the inside face of the elevator shaft sketch, and place the
startpoint for the wall.
Adding Structural Walls | 31

7 Drag the wall towards the left edge of the sketch, and click to place the endpoint of the wall.

9 Select the wall, and press the SPACEBAR to position the wall within the sketch outline.
Create a new wall type

11 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
12 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename.
13 In the Rename dialog, enter Generic - 400 mm, and click OK.
14 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit.
15 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, enter 400 mm for Thickness, and click OK.
16 In the Type Properties dialog, click Apply and then OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
Notice that the structural wall changes to the new type.
Place elevator shaft walls
18 Using the new wall type, place a structural wall on the opposite side of the elevator shaft.

19 Click inside the 3D view.
20 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft.
Place additional walls

22 Using the same method and wall type used to place the elevator shaft walls, and using the
architectural drawing as a guide, place additional structural walls at the following grid locations:
■ Place a structural wall that extends from grid location B6 to E6.

■ Place a structural wall that extends from grid location I6 to M6.
■ Place a structural wall that extends from grid location B8 to E8, and I8 to M8.

■ Place structural walls that enclose both elevator shafts (on three sides) between grids 11 and
13.
■ Place 3 structural walls on the following locations:

■ grid line C
■ grid line F
■ grid location L16 to L18.

Notice the completed structural walls are displayed in the 3D view.

24 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Structural Slab on page 36.
Adding a Structural Slab

In this exercise, you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing.

Training File
Select the slab type

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Slab.
3 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties.
4 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select Concrete-Commercial 362mm, and click OK.
Trace the imported drawing
5 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

7 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the grid.
8 Click the corner of the architectural drawing as the starting point for the slab.
Adding a Structural Slab | 37

9 Sketch lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported
drawing as snap points.
When sketching this slab, zoom in and out as needed, and make sure the sketch lines form a
closed loop. If necessary, use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar to clean up line intersections
and close gaps.
10 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

In the Revit dialog, click Yes when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to
attach to its bottom.
Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view.

12 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shaft Openings on page 38.
Adding Shaft Openings

In this exercise, you add shaft openings for the elevator shafts.

Training File
Add the first elevator shaft opening

2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening.
4 On the Design Bar, click Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ For Base Constraint, select Level 2.
■ For Top Constraint, select Up to Level: Level 5.
■ Click OK.
These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof
or the foundation.
7 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).

8 Trace the outline of the elevator shaft.
Adding Shaft Openings | 39

9 On the Design Bar, click Symbolic Lines.
10 Sketch 2 lines that connect the opposite corners of the shaft opening.

Notice the shaft openings are displayed in the 3D view.
Add a second elevator shaft opening
12 On the plan view, select the symbolic lines for the shaft openings.
Notice that the shaft opening is highlighted in the 3D view.

13 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).
14 Click the center point of the first shaft opening.
15 Click the center point of the second shaft.

Notice the completed shaft openings are displayed in the 3D view.
Adding Shaft Openings | 41

18 Proceed to the next exercise, Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 42.
Copying Elements to Multiple Levels

In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing elements to multiple levels of the structure.
Training File
Change the view visibility

1 Click inside the 3D view, and enter ZF.
■ Under Visibility, clear the m_RST_EW_Arch_Floor_Plan.dwg file.

The imported drawing is no longer visible in the drawing area.
4 Close the plan view.

Set the structural wall base constraints
5 Right-click a structural wall, and click Select All Instances.

All the structural walls are highlighted.

■ For Base Constraint, select Level 1.
■ For Base Offset, enter 0 mm.
■ Click OK.
Copy Level 2 framing and slab
8 Enter ZF, and draw a selection box around the entire structure.
9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

10 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.
11 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, Level 5, and Level 6, and then click OK.
The columns, structural walls, and slab are copied to Levels 3 through 6.
12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so that all the levels are visible.
Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 43

14 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Foundations on page 44.
Adding Foundations
In this exercise, you add wall foundations beneath each structural wall, and then add isolated foundations
beneath each column.
Training File
Place wall foundations

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Foundation ➤ Wall
3 In the Type Selector, select Wall Foundation : Bearing Footing - 900 x 300.
4 On the Options Bar, click Multiple.
5 Draw a selection box around the entire structure.

All the structural walls are highlighted.
6 On the Toolbar, click Finish.
7 On the View toolbar, click .

The structural walls are now supported by multiple wall foundations.
NOTE The individual wall foundations are highlighted for better visibility.
Place isolated foundations

9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Foundation ➤ Isolated.
10 In the Type Selector, select M_Footing-Rectangular : 1800 x 1200 x 450mm.
11 On the Options Bar, click (Structural Column).

12 Draw a selection box around the entire structure.
All the structural columns are highlighted.
13 On the Toolbar, click Finish.

The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations.
Adding Foundations | 45
NOTE The individual isolated foundations are highlighted for better visibility.

You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial.
16 Proceed to the next lesson, Structural Detailing on page 46.
Structural Detailing
In this lesson, you learn how to create typical details for an existing concrete structure, using the modelling
tools provided in Revit Structure. You will begin by opening a partially completed project, where you will
view the existing reinforcement detail in 3D, create a section view from a beam, place stirrup and longitudinal
rebar, and change the cover settings for the beam. Then, you will add individual rebar using the Revit
Structure rebar shape browser. Finally, you will import a typical reinforcement drafting view into the project
that was already created in AutoCAD.

Exploring the Reinforcement Project
In this exercise, you open an existing concrete project, view the existing reinforcement, and change the
rebar visibility.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open \Metric\m_RST_EW_Reinforcement.rvt.
Change rebar visibility

1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D.
■ Click the Model Categories tab.
■ Under Visibility, select Structural Rebar.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.
The existing reinforcement is now displayed in the drawing area.
Exploring the Reinforcement Project | 47

View rebar in 3D

5 Draw a selection box around the entire model.
6 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).

7 In the Filter dialog, do the following:
■ Click Check None.
■ Under Category, select Structural Rebar.

Notice the quantity of rebar already placed in the project.
■ Click Apply.

■ Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, click Edit for View Visibility States.
10 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog, for 3D View, select View as solid. Click OK.

12 Click ESC.
View reinforcement in a column and footing
13 On the View Control Bar, click the scale control, and select 1:20.
14 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a selection box around one of the structural columns.
Notice the parallel rebar placed in the footing, and the evenly placed stirrups in the column.

Footing reinforcement detail
Column reinforcement detail
View the rebar schedule marks
15 Select one of the vertical rebar in the column.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Construction, notice that the Schedule Mark value is
20.
This schedule mark value is used to reference this specific rebar type in a reinforcement schedule.

19 Using this same technique, view the schedule mark value for each rebar type in the column and
footing.
View the rebar in section view
20 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Building Section), double-click Section 1.

21 Click the rebar in the footing.
Notice that the rebar includes a stirrup/tie with a 135 degree bend. Also, notice that the graphical
controls are displayed.
22 Click the rebar in the concrete wall.
Notice that the rebar is actually an area reinforcement that spans the entire structural wall.
View the area reinforcement in elevation view
23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click North.

24 Click the area reinforcement in the wall.

Notice that the area reinforcement is represented with a special symbol that indicates the
approximate location of the reinforcement in the concrete wall.

26 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as m_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Placing Stirrup Rebar (Parallel) on page 52.
Placing Stirrup Rebar (Parallel)

In this exercise, you place stirrup rebar in a cross section view. The rebar is placed parallel to the exterior
face of the concrete beam.
Training File
Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, m_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.
Create a section view

2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the structure.
3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
4 Click inside the wall between grid lines 4 and 6, move the cursor down, and click outside the
south wall to place the section.

6 Click the section line, and position the drag bar, approximately as shown.
7 Press ESC.
8 Double-click the section bubble.
The section 3 view opens.
9 On the View Control Bar:

■ Click Scale control, and select 1:20.
■ Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.
■ Click (Hide Crop Region).
Placing Stirrup Rebar (Parallel) | 53

Add a break line
10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.

11 In the Type Selector, select Break Line.
12 Place the break line within the section view, approximately as shown.
13 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the line.

14 Click to place the break line.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the break line.
16 Select the break line shape handles.
17 Click and drag the break line shape handles to the left, cropping the section view.

Launch the rebar shape browser
19 Select the concrete beam.
20 On the Options Bar, click (Place Rebar Parallel).

The Rebar Shape Browser is launched, positioned to the right of the drawing area. This browser
provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. The active
rebar shape is highlighted. It corresponds to the shape specified on the Options Bar.

NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser, by clicking , on the Options Bar. For
training purposes, the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. The library is located
in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Metric Library.
Select rebar size and shape
21 In the Type Selector, select Rebar Bar : 13M.

22 In the Rebar Shape Browser, scroll down the list of available shapes, and select Rebar Shape :
T1.
Place rebar parallel to the beam face
23 Hover over the beam.

Press the SPACEBAR to change the location of the stirrup until it is positioned on the upper-right
corner of the beam.
24 Click to place the rebar shape.

27 Proceed to the next exercise, Placing Rebar (Perpendicular) on page 58.
Placing Rebar (Perpendicular)

In this exercise, you place rebar in a cross section of a beam in the longitudinal direction. The rebar is placed
perpendicular to the exterior face of the concrete beam.
Training File
Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face
1 In the Project Browser, click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 3.

2 Select the concrete beam.
3 On the Options Bar, click (Place Rebar Perpendicular).

4 In the Rebar Shape Browser, scroll to the top of the list of available shapes, and select Rebar
Shape: 00.
5 Place a single rebar in the upper-right corner of the section view, approximately as shown.

6 Click ESC.
Mirror the single rebar
7 Select the single rebar.
8 On the Toolbar, click (Mirror).

9 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection.
10 Click to place the rebar.

Adjust the rebar position
12 Select each rebar individually, and press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW until the rebar is
positioned as shown.
Placing Rebar (Perpendicular) | 59

Copy the rebar
14 Select the first rebar, press CTRL, and select the second rebar.
15 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

16 Select the highlighted rebar.
17 Move the cursor to the midpoint of the beam.

19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Select the midpoint rebar.
21 Move the cursor to the bottom of the beam.
Placing Rebar (Perpendicular) | 61

23 With the rebar still selected, press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to position the rebar as
shown.

Change the beam type
25 Select the beam.

26 In the Type Selector, select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam : 300 x 600mm.
Notice that the beam size is changed in the section view. Also, notice that the rebar is
automatically resized to fit within the new beam type.

27 On the Toolbar, (Undo).
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Setting the Rebar Cover on page 63.
Setting the Rebar Cover

In this exercise, you create new rebar cover settings, and then apply the settings to the reinforcement placed
in the concrete beam.
Training File
Create new rebar cover settings
2 On the Toolbar, click (Edit Rebar Cover).

Notice that the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines.
Setting the Rebar Cover | 63

3 On the Options Bar, click (Edit Cover Settings).
4 In the Rebar Cover Settings dialog, do the following:
■ Click Add.
■ Under Rebar Cover 2, for Setting, enter 10.0.
■ Click Duplicate.
■ Under Description, enter Rebar Cover 3.
■ Under Rebar Cover 3, for Setting, enter 30.0.
■ Click OK.

Set the beam rebar cover
5 On the Options Bar, click (Pick Elements).

6 Select the beam.
7 On the Options Bar, for Cover Settings, select Rebar Cover 2 <10>.
Notice that the rebar cover settings are changed in the section view.
Setting the Rebar Cover | 65

12 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating and Viewing a Rebar Set on page 66.
Creating and Viewing a Rebar Set

In this exercise, you create a rebar set within the concrete beam, and then view it in 3D.
Training File
Create the rebar set

2 Click the stirrup to select it.
3 On the Options Bar, for Layout, select Maximum Spacing, and for Spacing, enter 150.0.

Setup views
4 In the Project Browser, click Views (all) ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D.

For the remainder of this exercise, this view is referred to as the 3D view.

For the remainder of this exercise, this view is referred to as the section view.

The section view and the 3D views now display in separate windows in the drawing area.
7 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally.
View the rebar set in 3D
8 Click inside the section view and do the following:
■ On the Toolbar click .
■ Draw a zoom box around the entire section view.
9 Click inside the 3D view, and do the following:
■ On the Toolbar click .
■ Draw a zoom box around the concrete beam.
Creating and Viewing a Rebar Set | 67

■ On the View Control Bar, for Model Graphics Style, select Wireframe.
10 Click inside the section view, and select the rebar.
Notice that the rebar is highlighted in the 3D view.
11 Close the 3D view.

13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Tag to the Rebar on page 68.
Adding a Tag to the Rebar

In this exercise, you add a tag and annotation to the rebar set that you placed in the previous exercise.
Training File

Tag the stirrup

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
3 Click the stirrup in the concrete beam to place the tag.

Add rebar set information to the tag
5 Select the stirrup tag.

6 In the Type Selector, select M_Rebar_Tag : Quantity Type & Spacing - 1 Line.
Notice that the tag now shows the number of rebar and also provides spacing information for
the entire rebar set.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 70.
Adding a Tag to the Rebar | 69

Importing/Linking a DWG File
In this exercise, you import a 2-dimensional (2D) typical detail drawing file (DWG format) that was already
created in AutoCAD, also, you save these drawings into a Revit library, providing accessibility from multiple
projects.
Training File
Creating a new drafting view

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.
3 In the New Drafting View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Detail, and then click OK.
Notice that the Detail View is now available in the Project Browser, under Drafting Views
(Detail) ➤ Typical Detail
Importing the DWG file

5 In the Import/Link dialog, do the following:
■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog, click Training Files, and select
Metric\m_RST_EW_Typ_RC_detail.dwg
■ For Colors, select Black and White.
■ Click Open.
6 Enter ZF.
The detail drawing now appears in the drawing area.

Save the detail in a Revit library
7 In the Project Browser, right-click Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Typical Detail, and click Save to
New File.
8 In the Save As dialog, do the following:
■ For Save In, navigate to a folder of your choice.
■ For File name, enter RC Detail Library.
■ Click Save.
As you add more typical detail drawing files to the library, they can all be used in multiple
projects. Also, they can be loaded into a new project drafting view or used to create an entire
sheet of typical details.

You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop tutorial.

72
Modifying Project and
System Settings 3
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 working environment. In the first lesson,
you modify the system environment, which is independent of the project settings. In the second lesson, you modify
project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. Finally, you create
an office template, and set it as your default template.
Modifying System Settings

In this lesson, you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. System settings are local
to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project or template files.
Modifying General System Options

In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. These
settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options,
and your username when using worksets.
Set graphics settings

1 Open Revit Structure.
2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects.
3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.
4 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.
5 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK.
6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project.
7 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Tutorial_Default.rte.
Notice that the drawing area is black.

11 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.
73
12 Under Colors, click the value for Selection Color.
13 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK.
NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error
display using this color.
14 Click the General tab.

15 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ For Save Reminder interval, select One hour.
■ For Save to Central Reminder Interval, select One hour.
■ For Tooltip Assistance, select None.
16 Click OK.
18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.
Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.

21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.
Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.
22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars.

Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. This setting
controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area.
23 Click File menu ➤ Close.

24 When prompted to save, click No.
Setting Options

26 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Settings.rvt.
Notice that the system settings apply to this project.
74 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings

28 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab and make the following changes:
■ Under Graphics, clear Invert background color.
■ For Selection Color, select Red.
29 Click the General tab and make the following changes:

■ Under Notifications, select your preferred Save Reminder interval, and select Normal for
Tooltip Assistance.
■ Under Windows Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login
name displays by default.
■ Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete
journals older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify.
Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions.
These files are used primarily in the software support process. Journals can be run in order
to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. They are saved at the termination of each
Revit Structure session.
NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit
Structure\Journals. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed
Revit Structure.
30 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display
when you place the cursor over any building component.
31 Click File menu ➤ Close. If prompted, do not save the changes.

32 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying File Locations on page 75.
Specifying File Locations

In this exercise, you specify your default file locations. These settings control location of important Revit
Structure files such as your default project template, and the family template files, the family libraries, as
well as the material and rendering libraries.
Set file locations

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab.
3 Under Default template file, click Browse.
Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template.
TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤
Project, and click Browse to select a template.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.
6 In the Browse for Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open.
7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse.
Specifying File Locations | 75

This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates
that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.
However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a
large, centralized, structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.
8 Click Cancel.
Specify library settings and create a new library
9 In the Options dialog, click Place, and notice the list of library names.
The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path
points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library
names and path, and you can create new libraries.
NOTE When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit Structure file, you can click on the library
folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries
display as icons in the left pane.
10 Under Libraries, click (Add Value).

11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library, and change the name to My Library.
12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library, and click (Add Library Path) that displays
on the right-side of the field.

13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library
of Revit Structure projects, templates, or families, and click Open.
TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.
The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open, Save, Load, and Import
dialogs.
TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog.
14 Under Library Name, click My Library.
15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK.
17 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the My Library icon.
Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office,
you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity
and maintain office standards.
18 Click Cancel.
20 Click the File Locations tab.
21 Under Libraries, select My Library.
22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library.
Specifying File Locations | 77

23 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying Spelling Options on page 78.
Specifying Spelling Options

In this exercise, you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure.
Modify spelling settings

2 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
3 Under Settings, select Ignore words in UPPERCASE.
4 Under Personal dictionary, click Edit.
The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.
5 In the text editor, enter sheetmtl-Cu.

7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.
Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary.
8 Under Building industry dictionary, click Edit.

9 In the text editor, scroll down the list of building industry terms.
10 Click File menu ➤ Exit.
11 In the Options dialog, click OK.
12 On the Standard toolbar, click to open a new Revit Structure project using the default
template.
13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text.
14 Click in the drawing area, and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.
15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling.
Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.
It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.
17 Click OK.
19 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
20 Under Settings, click Restore Defaults.
This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.
21 Under Personal dictionary, click Edit.

The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.
22 In the text editor, do the following:

■ Delete sheetmtl-CU.
■ Click File menu ➤ Save.
■ Click File menu ➤ Exit.
23 In the Options dialog, click OK.

24 Click File menu ➤ Close. If prompted, do not save the changes.

25 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Snap Settings on page 79.
Modifying Snap Settings

In this exercise, you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects
and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off, or use the shortcut keys to force
a particular snap method. In this exercise, you modify snap increments, work with snapping turned off, and
use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.
Modify snap increments
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project.
2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Tutorial_Default.rte.
5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.
Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out
within a view, Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the
drawing area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.
6 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the
value 1000; and enter 500;.
7 Under Object Snaps, notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. For example,
if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM and only midpoint snaps are
recognized until you perform an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint,
snapping reverts to the system default settings.
8 In the Snaps dialog, click OK.

Modifying Snap Settings | 79

10 Click in the center of the drawing area, and move the cursor to the right.
Notice that the dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not, zoom out until it does
so.
This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension; it refers specifically to the dimension
that appears while you are in the act of sketching. The listening dimension reacts to the
movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries.
TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have
a wheel button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. While sketching,
you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out.
11 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment
shifts to 500 mm.
This is the increment that you added previously.
Sketch without snapping
12 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact
length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
13 Click to set the wall endpoint.

14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall, and move the cursor to the right. Do not set
the wall end point.
Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the
command is only active for one click of the mouse.
Use snapping shortcut keys
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and click Wall.

16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.
Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. If you move the cursor along the
wall, it will snap to the endpoints, the midpoint, and the wall edges.
17 Enter SM.
This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.
18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.
19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.

20 Move the cursor downward, and specify the wall endpoint.
21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.
22 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box, and delete the
value 500;.
Make sure you also delete the semicolon.
23 Click OK.
24 Click File menu ➤ Close, and do not save the file.
25 Proceed to the next lesson, Modifying Project Settings on page 81.
Modifying Project Settings

In this lesson, you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the
Settings menu. Using these options, you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents
within a project. You create and modify materials, annotations, lines, fill patterns, and object styles. Finally,
you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project.
The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. If you cannot complete
the exercises in their entirety, save the project file with a unique name, and use it to complete the exercises.
Creating and Applying Materials

In this exercise, you create a new material and apply it to a model component. When you apply a material
to a component, it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Well designed
materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Proj_Settings.rvt.
Create a new material
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.

Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. This list includes all materials available
for use on model components. When a model component is loaded into a project, all materials
that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project.
2 Scroll down, and select Concrete - Precast Concrete for Name.
Modifying Project Settings | 81

3 Click (Duplicate).
This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.
4 In the Duplicate Material dialog, enter Concrete - Precast, and click OK.
You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project.
Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In
the steps that follow, you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered
view.
Apply the new material
5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click T.O. Fnd. Wall.
6 Select the lower exterior wall, and click .

8 Click Duplicate.
9 Enter Foundation - Custom for the new wall name, and click OK.
10 In the Value field for Structure, click Edit.
11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2.
This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. It is currently assigned the material Concrete
- Cast.
12 On the right side of the Material field, click .

13 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete-Precast for Name, and click OK.
This is the material you created previously.
14 Click OK 3 times.
The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it.
15 Select the left foundation wall.

16 Press CTRL, and select the remaining exterior walls.
17 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom.

All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type.
19 On the View Toolbar, click .

Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in
this view. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. In
the following exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 84, you create a pattern and
apply it to this material.
20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Rendering dialog.
TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and select
Rendering.
21 In the drawing area, draw a pick box around the entire 3D image.
NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail, zoom into the model, and drag a zoom box
around the area you want to render.
22 In the Rendering dialog, do the following:

■ For Quality Setting, select Best.
■ Click Render.
The rendering process begins. When it is finished, the material that you created is displayed.
Creating and Applying Materials | 83

23 On the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show Model.
24 Close the Rendering dialog.
26 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 84.
Creating and Applying Fill Patterns

In this exercise, you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise.
There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Model patterns represent actual element appearance
on a building, such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the
model. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form, such as steel, which consists of a
double-diagonal hatching pattern. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Both pattern types are created and
applied in a similar way.
TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element appearance
on a structure. You can align, rotate, and move model patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the
end of that exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
Create a new fill pattern

1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click West.
Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall.
2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.

3 Under Pattern Type, choose Model.
4 Scroll down the list of patterns.
Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available.
5 Click New.
6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog, click Custom.
7 Under Custom, click Import.
8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software.

TIP Typically, your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you
set during installation.
9 Select Concrete_Surface.pat from the Common folder, and click Open.

10 Under Custom, select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale.
11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name, and click OK.
The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog.
12 Click OK.
Apply the concrete surface pattern
13 On the View Control Bar, select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe.

14 Select the wall.

17 In the Value field for Structure, click Edit.
18 In the Edit Assembly dialog, click in the Material field for Layer 2.
This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. It is currently assigned the material
Concrete-Precast.
19 On the right side of the Materials field, click .
20 Under Surface Pattern, click , to select a fill pattern.

21 In the Fill Patterns dialog, under Pattern Type, select Model.
22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern, and click OK.
23 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.
TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.
27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears.
Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 85

29 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Object Styles on page 86.
Controlling Object Styles

You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Object styles are
applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings.
Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type.
For example, there are often multiple trusses within a project. Rather than continually modify the type
properties of each truss, you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply
the change to all trusses.
Apply object styles

1 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing
area.

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.
5 In the Object Styles dialog, click Show categories from all disciplines.
6 Under Category, expand Walls.
7 Under the Walls category, double-click the Line Color field.
8 In the Color dialog, under Custom Colors, select Blue, and click OK.
9 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Notice the line color is applied to the wall.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 88.
Controlling Object Styles | 87

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles
In this exercise, you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. You then create a new
line style to represent underslab drainage.
Create a new line pattern

1 Verify the 3D view is active.
2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.
3 In the Line Patterns dialog, click New.
4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog, enter Truss for Name.
5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration:
6 Click OK twice.
You have created a new line pattern; now you must apply it. There are 2 ways to apply the line
style to the truss. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance
in a specific view, (example: plan view), or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all
views.
Apply the new line pattern
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Fnd. Wall.
8 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
10 In the Object Styles dialog:
■ Under Category, expand Structural Framing, and select Web Joist.
■ Under Line Pattern, select Truss.
■ Click OK.

12 Click the Model Categories tab, expand Structural Framing, and select Web Joist for Visibility.
13 Click Override for Line Style Projection.
This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view.
14 In the Select Line Style dialog, select Override and specify the following options:
■ Select 2 for Line Weight.
■ Select Blue for Line Color.
■ Select Truss for Line Pattern.
15 Click OK twice.
Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 89

Create a new line style
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Slab.

17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.
18 In the Line Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New.
19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name, and click OK.
20 For the Underslab Drainage category, specify the following values:
■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection.
■ Select Red for Line Color.
■ Select Dot 2mm for Line Pattern.
■ Click OK.
21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.

22 In the Type Selector, select Underslab Drainage.
23 In the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Click .
■ Enter 50 mm for Offset.
■ Click .
24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle, move the cursor to the
bottom-right corner of the slab, and click to set the rectangle endpoint.
25 In the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Click .
■ Click .
26 Draw 3 vertical lines, equally spaced as shown below.

Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view.

29 On the Model Categories tab, expand Lines, and clear Underslab Drainage.
This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view.
30 Click OK.
31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
33 On the Model Categories tab, expand Lines, and clear Underslab Drainage.
34 Click OK.
36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Annotations on page 91.
Modifying Annotations
In this exercise, you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project
settings. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number
rather than the beam type number.
Create a new dimension style

1 Verify the 3D View is active.
2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.
3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
4 Enter Linear - Metric for name, and click OK.
5 Under Text, click the default value for Units Format.
Modifying Annotations | 91
6 In the Format dialog:
■ Clear Use project settings.
■ Select Millimeters for Units.
■ Select mm for Unit suffix.
7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.

In the Type Selector, notice that there is a Linear - Metric dimension available.

Load a new beam tag
10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Fnd. Wall.
11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.
12 Click Load.
13 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\M_Structural Framing
Tag.rfa.
14 In the Tags dialog, scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that M_Structural Framing Tag
is now the assigned tag.
This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option.
15 Under Loaded Tags, click M_Structural Framing Tag, and select the drop-down arrow that displays.
Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project.
16 Click OK.
18 Click a beam.
A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam.
19 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.

Under Category, notice the structural framing tag appears twice. Each tag category has a different
loaded tag: one displays the type value, the other displays the instance value.
20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag, M_Structural Framing Tag.
21 Under Leader, verify that Create is clear, and click OK.
The remaining untagged beams are tagged.

24 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and
Detail Level Options on page 93.
Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail

Level Options
In this exercise, you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. In the first section, you
specify the project units of measurement - unless there is an override, dimension values display using this
setting. In the second section, you modify the temporary dimension settings. In the final section, you modify
the detail level assignments.
Set units of measurement
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.

2 In the Project Units dialog, under Length, click the default value for Format.
3 In the Format dialog, select To the nearest 100 for Rounding, and click OK.
4 In the Project Units dialog, under Area, click the default value for Format.
5 In the Format dialog, select 0 decimal places for Rounding, select meters squared for Unit suffix,
and click OK.
Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags.
6 Click OK.
Unless there is an override, dimensions use these project settings.
Specify temporary dimension properties
7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.

8 Under Walls, select Centerlines
9 Under Doors and Windows, select Openings, and click OK.
In this project, temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings.
Specify detail levels
10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level.

When you create a new view and specify its view scale, the detail level is specified automatically
according to the arrangement in the table.
TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View
Properties dialog.
In this table, you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level
to another. You do not select a view scale to move it. The view scale moves either from the
bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.
11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium, click .

Notice the 1: 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Any new view created using this
scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium.
Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options | 93

12 Click OK.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 94.
Modifying Project Browser Organization

In a typical project, you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. These drawings and sheets
can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. In order to organize
the views and sheets into sets of deliverables, you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify
how the Project Browser groups and sorts.
In this exercise, you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and
sorting the views and sheets.
NOTE In this exercise, you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different
phases of construction. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Project_Browser.rvt.
Organize the Project Browser by views
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views, and double-click Completed Project.
2 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all).

Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.
3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order, and notice the progression of each view:
■ Main Bldg - Phase 1-Structure
■ East Wing - Phase 2-Structure
■ West Wing - Phase 3-Structure
■ Completed Project-Structure

■ Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors
■ Completed Project
Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline.
4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

5 On the Views tab, select Discipline, and click OK.
On the Project Browser, notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.
6 In the Project Browser, expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views.

8 Select Phase, and click Apply.
In the Project Browser, notice that views are grouped based on phase.
9 In the Browser Organization dialog, select Type/Discipline, and click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, expand each view type, and notice that each is grouped by discipline.
Organize Project Browser by sheets

12 Click the Sheets tab.
13 Select Sheet Prefix, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, expand each sheet set.
Create a new browser organization name

16 Click the Views tab, and click New.
17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline, and click OK.
18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog, click the Folders tab, and specify the following:
■ Group by: Phase
■ Then by: Type
■ Then by: Discipline
19 Click OK.
20 In the Browser Organization dialog, select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser
organization, and click OK.
21 In the Project Browser, under Views, expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural
and Structural.
Modifying Project Browser Organization | 95

Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to
Phase, Type, and Discipline.

If you want to save this file, navigate to your preferred directory, enter a unique file name, and
click OK.
In this lesson, you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. All the
settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a
template file. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office, you maintain consistent
standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows, you create an office template.
Creating a Structural Template

In this lesson, you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. When you create
new projects, the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials, dimensions
styles, levels, preloaded families, and view names. You can save Project Browser organization schemes, named
print settings, and rendered scenes in a template. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to
choose from, you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company.
A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work.
This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. It is mostly
conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. The lesson begins with
choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that
you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation.
Choosing the Base Template

In this exercise, you select the starting point for your structural template.
Whenever you create a new project or template, a group of settings are used to specify the project
environment. For example, when you create a new project, you can select an existing template or begin the
project with no template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template, certain baseline settings
are still assigned to the new project. When you create a new template based on an existing template, the
same rules apply. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Depending on
your needs, choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work.
Review existing templates

2 Under Template File, click Browse.
Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. The template selection may
vary depending on your installation. Other than the default template, each is modified in a way
to make it useful to a particular industry, such as structural or construction.
The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your
starting point. If your work requires a variety of templates, you can modify one template and
use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates.
3 Select the Structural Analysis-DefaultMetric.rte template, and click Open.

4 In the New Project dialog, select Project for Create new.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views ➤ Elevations, and double-click Building Elevation.

7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and, in the drawing area, drag a zoom region
around the level heads.
Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template.
8 In the Project Browser, navigate throughout the various views and schedules.
Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. Other
templates, such as the structural template, are simple in respect to the predefined views and
schedules, but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural
tools.

If you have additional projects open, close them.

11 Under Template File, click Browse.
12 Select a default template.
TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other
than the default, you can select it now.
13 Click Open.
14 Under Create New, select Project Template, and click OK.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Project Settings on page 97.
Modifying Project Settings

In this exercise, you modify the project settings for your new template. These settings control the appearance
of components and their subcomponents within a project. In order to maintain office standards and reduce
rework, you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. For example, you can create the
materials commonly used in most projects. When you create the material, you can dictate its appearance
in all views and renderings.
In this exercise, you modify the following:
■ Materials
■ Fill patterns
■ Object styles
■ Line styles, weights, and patterns
■ Annotations
■ Project units
■ Temporary dimensions
■ Detail levels
■ Project Browser organization
■ View direction
In addition to the list above, there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications
that can be saved in a template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.

During this exercise, specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you
can adapt the template to your needs. For more details on modifying these settings, see the previous lesson,
Modifying System Settings on page 73, or refer to the Help documentation.
Create and modify materials

2 Scroll down the Name list.
Observe the materials that are already defined. You may want to rename or modify some of the
existing materials. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry,
create and modify them as needed.
3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs.

Create and modify fill patterns
4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.

5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns.
TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element
appearance on a structure. You can align, rotate, and move model patterns.
6 Create new fill patterns as needed, or modify existing patterns.
RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 81 for more information on creating new fill
patterns.
7 Click OK when finished.

Specify object styles

In the Object Styles dialog, you can set line weights, line colors, line patterns, and materials for
different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects.
TIP When the material of a component is set to by category, it adopts the material assigned to its
object styles category.
9 Click the Model Objects tab, and scroll through the list of categories.
10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed.
11 If necessary, create new subcategories.
12 Click the Annotation Objects tab.
13 Modify categories, and create new subcategories as needed.
14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog.
Modify line weights
15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights.

The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. You
can add and delete view scales.
In the dialog, there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles, one for perspective model
line styles, and one for annotation symbol line styles.
The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components, such as beams
and columns in orthographic views. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. You
can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales.

The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views.
The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols, such as section
lines and dimension lines. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale.
16 Click the Model Line Weights tab.

17 Modify existing line weights as needed.
18 Add and delete view scales as needed.
19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab.
21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab.
23 Click OK.
Modify line patterns
24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.

25 Scroll through the list of line patterns.
26 To modify a line pattern, select it, and click Edit.
27 Add and delete line patterns as needed.
28 Click OK.
Modify line styles
29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.

30 For existing line categories, modify the line weight, line color, or line pattern as needed.
31 If necessary, create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified
or created.
32 Click OK.
Modify arrowheads
33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads.

The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes, tags, and dimensions.
34 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary.

36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead.
37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify the
properties.
38 Click OK.
Modify Dimension Styles
39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.

Linear, angular, and radial dimensions are modified separately.
40 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary.

42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style.
43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify
the properties.

44 Click OK.
45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions.
■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular.
■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial.
Modify loaded tags
46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. For example, when
you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected, the beam is tagged using the tag
assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. You can override tag assignment using
the Type Selector.
47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags.

Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any
category. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category, the last loaded tag becomes
the default tag. In the Tags dialog, you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag
from the drop-down list.
48 To load new annotation tags, click Load.

49 After you have loaded the necessary tags, make sure each category is assigned the desired tag,
and click OK.
Specify project units
50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.

51 Under Length, click Format.
52 Modify the unit settings if necessary.
53 Click OK.
54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area, Volume, and Angle settings.
55 Specify the Slope option, and choose a decimal symbol.
56 Click OK.
Specify temporary dimensions
57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.

58 Under Walls, specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default.
TIP In the drawing area, you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines.
59 Under Doors and Windows, specify the default location for temporary dimensions.
60 Click OK.
Specify detail levels
61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level.

When you create a new view, the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this
table. The detail level is based on view scale. You can override the detail level at any time by
specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command.
View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse, Medium, or Fine. Using the
arrows between the columns, you can move view scales from one detail level to another.
62 Review the table, and move view scales as needed.

NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. To move the view scales, click the arrows
between columns. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa.
63 Click OK.
Modify project browser organization

In a typical project, you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. These drawings
and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is
cumbersome. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables, you can use the
Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts.
65 In the Browser Organization dialog, click the Views tab.

66 Delete, Rename, or Edit existing organization types.
67 If necessary, create new browser organization types.
68 Click the Sheets tab.
69 Delete, Rename, or Edit existing organization types.
70 If necessary, create new browser organization types.
71 Click OK.
Setting View Direction
72 In the Project Browser, right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family, and select
Properties.
In certain projects, engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. This
parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. For example, you can
view the project from the slab looking up (up direction), or from the roof looking down (down
direction).

74 In the Type Properties dialog, click View Direction.

75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down.
76 Click OK to exit the dialogs.
Additional project settings
77 On the Settings menu, there are several additional commands that control the project
environment. Although these settings can be saved within a template, you should consider each
carefully before applying changes to a template.
For example, you can save rendered scene settings to a template. However, you may only want
to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. In such a case, you
must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.
Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Use the table below as a
checklist, and make modifications in each area as necessary. Links to associated tutorials are
provided. You can find additional information in Help. Each command is available on the
Settings menu.
Settings Menu Associated Tutorial Considerations

Command
Project Parameters This command is covered in an exer- If necessary, you can add project (and shared)
cise later in this lesson. See Setting up parameters to a template. This could be useful
Shared and Project Parameters on for things such as title blocks, and framing tags.
page 110.
View Templates This command is covered in an exer- Create and modify the view templates to control
cise later in this lesson. See Modifying the appearance of default views.
Views and View Templates on page
105.

Settings Menu Associated Tutorial Considerations
Command
Structural Settings This command is covered in an exer- If necessary, you can set the symbolic represent-
cise later in this lesson. See Modifying ation settings for cutback distance, brace sym-
Structural Settings on page 108. bols, and column symbols.
78 Proceed to the next exercise, Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 103.
Loading and Modifying Families and Groups

In this exercise, you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise.
If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before starting this exercise. Depending on the
intended use of this template, you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure
consistency throughout the office. You can load any family or group into a template. Obviously, you should
only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. For example, you
could load detail components, titleblocks, and beams. You may want to modify slab types to add a more
diverse selection within the template. Although the options are endless, there are some important thoughts
to consider.
It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Although
this is possible, it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first
component was added to the project. In addition, each component loaded will add to the length of the
relative Type Selector list. For example, if you loaded every beam type you could find, you would have to
scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. This would be
cumbersome and counterproductive. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load
and modify within a template.
Load and modify families

1 Use the project started in the previous exercise, and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar,
click Beam.
2 In the Type Selector, notice the list of beams is already loaded.
If this selection is satisfactory, you can move onto the next component type. However, you may
want to delete, modify, or add to this selection. You can do this in several ways: select a
component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type, or use the Project Browser
to delete an existing type. In the steps that follow, you do both.
3 To modify, create, or load a new beam type, click on the Options Bar.
Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps.
Goal: Steps:
Load new beam type In the Element Properties dialog, select Load. Navigate to the directory
containing the beam type, select it, and click Open.
Modify beam type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Make modifications, and
click OK.
Create new beam type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Click Duplicate, enter a
name, and click OK. Modify type properties, and click OK.
Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 103

4 Click OK.
5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.
You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not
available on this tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.
6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library.

Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. Loading from the library is
quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Press ESC twice to return to
the template.
Use Project Browser to modify families
7 In the Project Browser, expand Families.
Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to modify family
types.
8 Expand Annotation Symbols.

Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. (The titleblock name may vary depending on
the template you started with.)
9 Expand the titleblock, and select the titleblock type.

10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Preview.
This titleblock is currently part of the template. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner.
You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.
11 To load a titleblock, click Load.

12 Click OK.
You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. To do so,
right-click the component, and click Delete.
13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps, load, create, or modify any component
families or groups as necessary.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Views and View Templates on page 105.

Modifying Views and View Templates
At the beginning of this lesson, you created new projects using different templates, and you noticed that
each template had a unique set of predefined views. In this exercise, you create the views required for your
template. In addition, you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance
of the views.
View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. You can
also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. The view
inherits view properties such as View Scale, View Range, Discipline, Detail Level, and the visibility settings
of categories and subcategories. In this exercise, you will first modify view templates, and then create new
views that will automatically use those templates.
Create and modify view templates
1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates.

2 For Name, select Structural Framing Plan.
These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. At any time,
you can apply a view template to any view. These values represent the starting point for each
plan view.
By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs, you save time and increase
consistency.
3 Specify each value as needed. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this
view type.
4 If necessary, rename or duplicate the view template, and make modifications.
5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list.
6 Click OK.
Apply view templates
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views ➤ Structural Plans, and double-click Level 1.
8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.
TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser, select the view, right-click, and
select Apply View Template.
Modifying Views and View Templates | 105

Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. When the view template is applied the
view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. After the
template is applied, the view is not linked to the template in any way. Subsequent modifications
to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. There
is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view, nor is there a limit
to the number of view templates that you can apply.
TIP To apply the template to multiple views, select the view in the Project Browser, and press Ctrl
while selecting additional views. Then right-click and select Apply View Template.
9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template.

10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type.
This option means that every time a new plan view is created, this view template will be used
to set the initial view properties.
11 Click Apply, and click OK.

14 Select the Structural Plan template, click Apply, and click OK.
15 If you modified any other view templates, open the view from the Project Browser, and apply
the appropriate template.
Create and modify views
16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Building Elevation.

Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. Black levels have no
associated views.
17 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, review the existing floor plans.
18 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, right-click Level 1, and notice the context menu
includes options to rename, duplicate, or delete this view.
You can rename this view, if desired. You can also duplicate or delete the view.
19 In the Project Browser, review the Structural plans and elevations. Rename, duplicate, or delete
them as needed.
20 To add additional levels to the template, click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view.
21 In the Options Bar, select Make Plan View.

22 Add the new level within the elevation view.
The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view
properties.
23 Rename and reposition the level as needed.

24 Create additional levels as needed.
Create 3D views
25 To add 3D views to the template, click on the View toolbar.

26 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views.
27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and select Rename.
28 Rename the 3D View.
If necessary, you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. To do so, click View
menu ➤ View Properties.

29 To create additional 3D views, click on the View toolbar.
Dynamically Modify Views

The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. This tool provides freeform navigation for
exterior and interior viewing.
31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options.
Using this dialog, you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance.
Save the view
32 To save the view, click , supply a view name, and click OK.
The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views.
Create and modify schedules
33 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

You may want to add schedules to a template. You may want to consider adding the schedules
that you use most often, and modify their properties accordingly. This can save time and ensure
office standards are maintained.
34 If you want to add schedules to your template, select the category type, and click OK.
35 In the Schedule Properties dialog, make the following modifications as needed:
■ On the Fields tab, select and order required fields.
■ On the Filter tab, assign filters.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, modify settings.
Modifying Views and View Templates | 107

■ On the Formatting tab, modify settings.
■ On the Appearance tab, modify settings.
36 Click OK.
37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.
Add sheets to the template
38 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.

You are prompted to select a titleblock. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the
template, select one, and click OK.
TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. To do so, select the default titleblock,
and click OK. After the sheet is created, select the titleblock and delete it. You can still add views to
the sheet. To later add a titleblock to a sheet, click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock.
39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar.
TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet.
40 To rename or renumber the sheet, right-click the sheet in the Project Browser, and click Rename,
or on the sheet itself, double-click the sheet number.
41 Create new sheets as needed.
Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet.
42 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Structural Settings on page 108.
Modifying Structural Settings

You can create custom cutback distances for braces, beams, and columns. You can also create custom brace
symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. You may want to add symbolic settings
to a template. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often, and modify their
properties accordingly. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained.
Create custom symbolic representations
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings.

2 In the Structural Settings dialog, click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab.

3 Under General, enter the desired values for the following cutback distances:
■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam
to the center of the adjoining beam.
■ Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the
beam endpoint.
4 Under Brace Symbols, specify the desired line representation and offset as follows:
■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or
Line with Angle.)
■ Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset.
5 Click OK.
6 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 109.
Modifying Import/Export Settings

In this exercise, you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. You then set the import line
weights for DWG/DXF. When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight
based on the pen number/line weight settings you created.
Modify export layers for DWG and DXF
1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF.

The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer
names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. Revit Structure presets the layer
names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. The layer names are stored
in a text file (exportlayers.txt), and are exported along with your project into the appropriate
CAD program. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program
installation directory.
Modifying Import/Export Settings | 109

2 For each category, specify the following:
■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID
■ Cut Layer Name and Color ID
3 If you modified the settings in this dialog, click Save As, name the file, and click Save.
Modify export layers for DGN
4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN.

The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn.txt) for MicroStation, and then are
exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer mapping files
reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory.
5 For each category, specify the following:

■ Projection Level Number and Color ID
■ Cut Level Number and Color ID
6 If you modified the settings in this dialog, click Save As, name the file, and click Save.
Modify import line weights
7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.

You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line
weight. When you save these mappings to a text file, they become the set mappings for the
project. These settings are retained within the project template; therefore, you do not need to
worry about where the text file is saved.
8 In the dialog, match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values
from 1 - 16); for example, Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1, Pen Number 2 to Line
Weight Number 2, and so on. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired.
9 Click Save As, name the file, and click Save.
When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on
the pen number/line weight settings you created.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 110.
Setting up Shared and Project Parameters

In this exercise, you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters, project parameters, and
related multi-category tags and schedules.
Using shared parameters, you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined
instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. You can add these
shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring
consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category
schedules. For example, you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family
component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default.
Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for
the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. They cannot be shared with other projects,
and unlike shared parameters, they cannot be used to tag objects.
Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of
category. When scheduling, you normally schedule a single category: rooms, doors, windows, and so on.
When you create a multi-category schedule, it lists components regardless of category by using an external
parameter as a filter.

In this exercise, detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. If you
do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters, you can skip this exercise and move on to
the last exercise of this lesson, Creating Named Print Settings.
Set up shared parameters
1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.
NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If a file already exists, you can
browse to that file and modify it as needed.
2 Click Create.
This allows you to name the external parameter file. If this template will be used by multiple
people within an office, you may want to save the file to a network location.
3 Name and save the file.

After the file is named, you can begin creating parameter groups.
4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New.

5 Enter the group name, and click OK.
6 Create as many groups as needed.
For each parameter group, you can create a list of parameters.
7 Under Parameter group, select a group to which you want to add parameters.
8 Under Parameters, click New.
9 Name the parameter, and specify the Type.
10 Click OK.
11 For each parameter group, add required parameters.
12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.
Set up project parameters
13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.

14 Click Add.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Project parameter.
16 Under Name, enter a parameter name.
17 Under Discipline, select a parameter discipline type.
18 Under Type, select a parameter value type.
19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type.
20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies.
21 Click OK.
22 Add project parameters as needed.
23 To add a shared project parameter, click Add, and select Shared Parameter.
24 Click Select, and select a shared parameter.
25 Click OK.
26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter, and
specify the categories to which this parameter applies.
27 Click OK.
28 Add shared project parameters as needed, and click OK when finished.
Create and load multi-category tags
29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor.
Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 111

For information on creating multi-category tags, see the tutorial referenced in the introduction
of this exercise, or consult the Help documentation.
After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor, you can load them into
the template.
30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load, select the tag, and click Open.
The tag is now part of the template.
Create multi-category schedules

33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category.
34 Under Name, enter a name for the schedule, and click OK.
35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise.
Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields.
36 When you have completed the schedule, click OK.

37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed.
38 Proceed to the final exercise, Creating Named Print Settings on page 112.
Creating Named Print Settings

In this exercise, you create named print settings, and add them to your default template file. This can be
beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. For each printer, you can set options
such as sheet sizes, paper placement, and the percent of actual size. You can also create named settings for
printing to a DWF writer. By creating named settings within the template, you need only select a setting,
make minor modifications if necessary, and print.
Create named print settings
1 Click File menu ➤ Print.

2 Under Name, select the first printer for which you want to create named settings.

3 Under Settings, click Setup.
4 Click Save As.
5 In the New dialog, enter a name for the print setting and click OK.
6 Modify the printer settings.
7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer, click New, and create additional settings
as needed.
8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer.
Creating Named Print Settings | 113

9 In the Print dialog, select a different printer, click Setup, and create new settings for this printer.
10 Repeat these steps as needed.
TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer.
11 Click OK when finished.

Your template is complete. The only remaining task is to save it.
Save the template

13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.
If you need to share this file with others, you should save it to a network path.
14 Under Save as type, select Template Files (*.rte).

15 Name the template, and click Save.
Use the template
16 To use the template, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

17 Select Browse, and navigate to the location where you saved the template.
18 Select the template, and click Open.
19 Click OK.
The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.
You can also set this template as your default template.
Set the template as your default template file

21 Click the File Locations tab.
22 Next to Default template file, click Browse.
23 Navigate to the template location, select it, and click Open.
24 Click OK.
TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project, and
save it as a template file. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In addition, you can
use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another.
In this lesson, you modified settings, loaded components, and saved them to a template. By investing the
time to individualize your template, you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive
work that would be done by each employee for each project.

Starting a New Project
4
In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Autodesk Revit Structure 2009, by importing or linking an existing
Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD, AutoCAD Architecture, and Revit Architecture.
Importing/Linking Drawing Files

In this lesson, you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. The imported file
is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model.
Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File

In this lesson, you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use
as a background.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_1.rvt.
NOTE For training purposes, some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction
with architectural columns. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 127, you use these columns
to complete the structural framing.
1 In the Project Browser, select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans.


3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog, click Training Files, and select
Metric\m_STR_CSM_Level2.dwg.
4 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ Select Link and Current view only.
NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. The file
becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows
you to view, drag, copy, paste, and rotate the view as one object. However, you cannot select
individual elements in the linked model.
115
■ For Colors, select Black and White.
■ Click Open.
Exterior facade outlines, stairs and elevator opening symbols, and a few basic interior walls
and doors display in the view.
5 In the drawing area, click the imported/linked file.
6 On the Options toolbar, click to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the
drawing area.

8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog, select the Imported Categories tab.
9 Select Halftone for the value of m_STR_CSM_Level2.dwg, and click OK.
116 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project

The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns.

You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, Creating a Structural Model on page
127, a new training file is supplied.
Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File

In this lesson, you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for
use as a background. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture, the file should be prepared as
follows:
■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1.
■ Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export.
In the Xref Manager dialog, select each file and select Insert for Bind Type.
■ On the File menu, select Export to AutoCAD, and select the latest available format.
Training File
NOTE For training purposes, some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction
with architectural columns. In the next tutorial, Creating a Structural Model on page 127, you use these columns
to complete the structural framing.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), and expand Structural Plans.
2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats

3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog, click Training Files, and select
Metric\m_RST_Import_ADT.dwg.
4 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ For Colors, select Invert.
■ For Positioning, select Auto - Origin to Origin.
Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 117

■ Click Open.
Exterior facade outlines, stairs, and elevator opening symbols, and a few basic interior walls
and doors display in the view.
5 In the drawing area, click the imported/linked file.
Revit Structure drawing area.

8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog, click the Imported Categories tab.
9 Select Halftone for the value of m_RST_Import_ADT.dwg, and click OK.

The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns.

11 In the drawing area, click the linked file.
12 On the Options toolbar, click Partial Explode.
13 Select any column, and on the Option Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following:
■ Under Constraints, enter -300 mm for Base Offset.
■ Click OK.
Notice the column adjusts to the change.
Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 119

15 Close the Element Properties dialog.
You can save the open file if desired. In the next tutorial, Creating a Structural Model on page
127, a new training file is supplied.
Linking a Revit Architecture File

In this exercise, you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use
as a background. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination
between architects and structural engineers. You can copy grids, levels, columns, walls, and floors from the
original design and monitor any changes made to those elements.
Open a new project

2 In the New Project dialog, select a template file, select Project under Create New, and click OK.
Link a Revit Architecture file
3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.

4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_STR_CSM_Revit.rvt.
5 In the Add Link dialog, for Positioning, select Auto - Origin to Origin.
6 Click Open.

Exterior facade outlines, stairs and elevator opening symbols, and a few basic interior walls and
doors display in the view.
7 Enter ZF. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.

8 In the drawing area, click the linked file.
Revit Structure drawing area.
10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link.

11 Click the imported Revit drawing. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode
Set options
12 On the Design Bar, click Options.
Linking a Revit Architecture File | 121

The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. Elements available for monitoring are separated into
5 categories (Levels, Grids, Columns, Walls, and Floors). On each tab the Original Type column
identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file, and the New Type for the corresponding
element available in the template selected. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set
for that specific element. Also, you can exclude element types you do not want to copy.
13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog, click the Columns tab.
NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. A column may
span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is
generated. Therefore, columns need to be split at each level.
14 In the Columns dialog, under Additional Copy Parameters, select Split Columns by Levels.
15 Set the other parameter as desired. When finished, click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options
Dialog.
Copy grids
16 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, select Level 2.

17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar, click Copy.
18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored.
To select more than one grid, click Multiple on the Options toolbar, and while pressing CTRL,
make selections.

NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project, and that the type from
the new project will be used, click OK.
After you select the grid, an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the
original element.
NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. The warning can
be ignored.
Copying levels
19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click Building Elevation.
21 Click the level to be copied/monitored.
To select more than one level, click Multiple on the Options toolbar, press CTRL, and select each
level.

After you select each level, an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the
original element.
be ignored.
Copy structural walls, floors, and columns
22 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, select Level 1.

24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored.
To select more than one element, click Multiple on the Options toolbar, press CTRL, and select
each element.
After selecting each element, an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the
original element.
be ignored.
25 On the Design bar, click Finish Mode.

Change the structural usage of the copied elements
26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored, and on the Options Bar, click .

27 In the Element Properties dialog, select Bearing for Structural Usage, and click OK.
28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored, and on the Option Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog, check the value for Structural, and click OK.
NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls, columns, and floors, the structural usage parameter
must be changed in the Element Properties dialog, so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical
projection plane feature for those elements.
Manage links
30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links.

31 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab.
The linked Revit file is displayed.
32 In the Manage Links dialog, click Reference Type.

■ Select Overlay. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. The link will not follow the
host if it becomes linked into another file.
Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file.
■ Click OK.

NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. In a later tutorial, Project Coordination
on page 427, the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. The coordination
monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred.
You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied.
34 Proceed to the next tutorial, Creating a Structural Model on page 127.

Creating a Structural
Model 5
In this chapter, you create a structural model using the tools available in Autodesk Revit Structure 2009.
Creating a Structural Model

In this lesson, you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. You copy columns and use the
paste-align command to add structure to other levels. You also learn how to splice the columns. After you
copy columns, you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2, and then copy this framing to other levels.
127
Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing
In this exercise, the imported drawing is a halftone, which you use as a background drawing for placing
columns.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Grids.rvt.
1 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the
structural model.

4 Select the left vertical grid line.
Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head.
5 Click the value in the grid head, and enter A.
128 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

As you select subsequent grid lines, they are labelled in alphabetical sequence.
6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A.
Notice it is labeled B.
7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. Zoom in and out as needed.
8 When you get to grid I, change the value to J. The last vertical grid is K.
9 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the
structural model.
10 Select the upper horizontal grid line.
Notice it is grid L.
Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 129

11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head, and enter 1 for the new value.
12 Select the next grid line below grid 1.
Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric.
13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. The bottom grid should be grid 5.

Draw a grid using the arc tool
15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).
16 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the atrium.
17 On the Design Bar, click Grid.

19 Click the column to select the arc start point.

20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint.
21 Click the column to set the arc radius.
Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 131

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the grid.
Extend grid
23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown.
24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown.

To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or
close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Structural Columns on page 133.
Adding Structural Columns

In this exercise, you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid
intersection. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Columns.rvt.
Place columns at grid intersections

1 Enter ZF.

Level 2 plan view
2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Column.
NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display, right-click in the Design Bar, and click
Modelling.
3 In the Type Selector, select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250X38.5.
4 In the Options Bar, click .
NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns, Revit Structure places the tops of
the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below.
5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it.
6 On the Options Bar, click Finish.

7 Press ESC.
Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. In addition, there are a few extraneous
columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure.
8 Select the columns listed below, which are outside of the structure footprint, and press DELETE.
■ G1, H1, J1, K1
■ G2, H2, J2, K2
■ G5, H5, J5, K5
■ K3, K4
■ A5, B5, C5
Specify base and top of column elevations
9 Right-click the column located at C2, and click Select All Instances.
TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns.

11 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ Under Constraints, enter 600 mm for Base Offset.
■ Under Constraints, enter 600 mm for Top Offset.
■ Click OK.

Create new levels
13 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation.
14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Level.
15 On the left side of the elevation, specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 3000
mm above Level 2, and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the
right side.
NOTE If necessary, you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying
the level elevation. Level 3 should be 3000 mm above Level 2.
Notice the new level is named Level 3. A new structural plan view by the same name is also
created and listed within the Project Browser.
16 Use the same method to create Level 4.

Level 4 should be 3000 mm above Level 3 with an elevation of 9000 mm.

Adjust location of the grid
18 Select grid head A.

19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head.
20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown.
Copy the columns to new levels

22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model.

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Columns, and click OK.
All of the structural columns in the model remain selected.

27 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3 and Level 4, and click OK.
TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections.

29 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South Elevation.
Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4

31 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Horizontal Framing on page 137.

Adding Horizontal Framing
In this exercise, you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Framing.rvt.
Specify beam type

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
3 In the Type Selector, select UB-Universal Beam: 356x171x51UB.
Add girders
4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure.
5 On the Options Bar:

■ Specify Level 2 for Plane.
■ Specify Girder for Usage.
■ Click Grid.
6 Select grid lines H and J.
TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip.

Adding Horizontal Framing | 137

9 On grids H and J, delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5.
12 Select a column center, and draw a girder from column to column, framing the bays with girders.
NOTE In the following image, framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased
for training purposes.

Set top of steel
14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3, and click Select All Instances.

■ Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other.
■ Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -400 mm.
■ Click OK.
Copy the girders to levels above

19 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3 and Level 4.
20 Click OK.
21 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click East Section - Perspective.

NOTE If necessary, you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents
of the view.
Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4.

23 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Beam Systems on page 139.
Adding Beam Systems

In this exercise, you add beam systems to Level 2.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System.rvt.
Sketch the beam system

2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam System.
4 On the Options Bar, click Sketch.
5 On the Design Bar, click Structural Beam System Properties.
■ Under Constraints, enter -400 mm for Elevation.
■ Under Pattern, select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule.
■ For Spacing, enter 1800 mm.
■ For Justification, select Center.
■ For Beam Type, select UB-Universal Beam: 254x102x28UB.
7 Click OK.
Adding Beam Systems | 139

8 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports.
9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay.
NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. The
longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. In the next step
you edit the beam direction.
10 On the Design Bar, click Beam Direction.

11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3.

NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images, the framing tag visibility has been turned off
for training purposes.

13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam
system property values in the Element Properties dialog:
■ Under Pattern, select Fixed Number for Layout Rule.
■ For Number of Lines, specify 2.
14 When specifying the beam direction, select the girder between J2 and J3.

Automatically create a beam system

17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams.

■ For Number of Lines, specify 3.
■ Click OK.
21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay.
22 Click to place the beam system.

23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay.

Copy the beam systems to levels above
26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system, and press TAB until the beam
system highlights.
NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not
just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. You will need to cycle through some of the
elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above.

Beam system displays with dashed lines
27 Right-click on the beam system, and click Select All Instances.

30 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3 and Level 4.
31 Click OK.
32 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click East Sections - Perspective.
Notice the copied beam systems.

34 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Composite Deck on page 146.

Adding a Composite Deck
In this exercise, you add a composite deck to Level 2.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Deck.rvt.
Add composite deck

■ For Type, select 160mm Concrete with 50mm Metal Deck.
■ Under Constraints, enter -200 mm for Height Offset from Level.
5 Click OK.
7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as
snap points, and then sketch along the girders.

Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. The filled
half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck.
Copy the slab to other levels
9 Select the slab.

12 In the dialog, select Level 3 and Level 4, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click East Section - Perspective.
Adding a Composite Deck | 147

16 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Bracing on page 148.
Adding Bracing
In this exercise, you add vertical bracing to a bay.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing.rvt.
Create the framing elevation

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Framing Elevation.
3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J, and when it highlights, click to
place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown.
4 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Interior Elevations), double-click Elevation 1-a.
5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Brace.
6 In the Type Selector, select M_L-Angle: L203x152x14.3.
7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3:
■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint), and then click the left endpoint of the
Level 2 beam for the start point. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point.

■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint), and then click the midpoint of the beam
at Level 3 for the endpoint.
NOTE If necessary, you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the
columns on grids H and J.
8 Use the same method for the opposite brace.
9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4.
Adding Bracing | 149

Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model.

12 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shear Walls on page 150.
Adding Shear Walls

In this exercise, you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls.rvt.
Add shear walls

2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4.

4 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Exterior - 225 mm Concrete.
■ Select Chain.
■ For Depth, specify Ground Level.
6 Sketch 4 walls, tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file.
TIP After sketching the walls, you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge
the wall to a particular location.
Adding Shear Walls | 151

7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls.
8 Select all 4 walls.
TIP During selection, you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with
one click.

10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top
Constraint, and click OK.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Isolated Foundations on page 152.
Adding Isolated Foundations

In this exercise, you add isolated foundations to column locations.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation.rvt.
Place isolated foundations

2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure.
3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements.

■ Select Structural Columns.
■ Click OK.

■ Under Constraints, enter 0 mm for Base Offset.
■ Under Analytical Model, select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection.
■ Under Analytical Model, select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection.
■ Click OK.
8 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level.

10 In the Type Selector, select M_Footing-Rectangular:1800x1200x450 mm.
11 In the drawing area, click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal
framing to place an isolated footing at each location.
NOTE In the following image, the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. In your
training file, the imported DWG file does not display in this view.
By default, the footing is placed at Ground Level.
Adding Isolated Foundations | 153


15 Proceed to the next exercise, Completing the Structural Model on page 154.
Completing the Structural Model

In previous lessons, you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. In the exercises that
follow, you complete the structural model, adding horizontal framing, bracing, openings, foundation, and
concrete wall framing.
Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2

In this exercise, you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems, as well
as cantilevers and outriggers.
Training File
Add girders using the grid tool

■ Click Grid.

NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model, using the Grid tool does not
duplicate girders at these locations.
5 Draw a pick box around all the grids.
TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually.

Manually add additional beams
model.
9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises, complete the framing of this
bay. Use the UB-Universal Beam: 356x171x51UB beam type for the 5 new beams.
10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool.
Add beam chains to the following locations, zooming in and out as needed:
■ Above grid line 1 between B and E.
■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda.
Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 155

■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear
walls.
■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.
■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5.

Specify the top of steel
11 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner
of the model.
12 Select the girder between A2 and B2.
13 Right-click, and click Select All Instances.

■ Click OK.
Add a beam system to the bay

■ For Number of Lines, enter 3.
■ Select UB-Universal Beam: 254x102x28UB for Beam Type.
■ Click OK.
19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell, select the top girder.

Sketch a beam system

■ For Number of Lines, enter 3.
■ Select UB-Universal Beam: 254x102x28UB for Beam Type.
■ Click OK.

25 Using the sketch tool, trace the outline of the bay.
26 On the Sketch Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it.
If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted, ignore it.

NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens
of bays within this model, a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems
added as shown.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 160.
Adding Cantilevered Beams

In this exercise, you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2.
Training File
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to all bays. The visibility of structural framing tags
has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. In addition, the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you
built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. Lastly, the base offset of the
structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings.
Add cantilevered members and outriggers

model.


■ Click OK.
Add cantilevers at columns
6 Select column A1 as the beam start point.
7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior
glazing as the endpoint.
Adding Cantilevered Beams | 161

8 Using the same method, add a cantilever beginning at column A2.
Add an outrigger

11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger.
12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger.
Add intermediate cantilevers
13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2.

15 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 162.
Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck

In this exercise, you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model.
Training File

In this training file, additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. In addition, the
following new levels were added: 5, 6, 7, Roof, Garage Level-1, and Foundation. The pre-existing columns
were paste-aligned to the roof level.
Add concrete slab with metal deck

■ For Floor Type, select 160mm Concrete with 50 mm Metal Deck.
■ For Height Offset from Level, enter -200 mm.
■ Click OK.

6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points.
When sketching this deck, you can use a combination of lines including; sketched, picked,
straight, and arced. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps.
Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 163

TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall, select Chain on the Options Bar, and sketch a chain
of continuous line segments.
7 Click Finish Sketch.

9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges).


11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 165.
Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.
Add first stairway shaft opening

NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the
View Control Bar to make the change.
2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe).

3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4.
5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

■ For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof.
■ For Base Constraint, select Foundation.
■ For Top Offset, enter -300 mm.
■ For Base Offset, enter -300 mm.
■ Click OK.
Adding Shafts | 165

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof
or the foundation.

Add second stairway shaft opening
10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2.

13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.
TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the
external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and
intersections.

■ For Top Offset, enter 300 mm.
■ For Base Offset, enter 300 mm.
■ Click OK.

19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 167.
Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.
Copy Level 2 framing and deck

2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model.

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other),
Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK.
7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.
Duplicating Framing | 167

Copied levels with stair openings
Modify roof and framing

10 Select the floor.
11 On the Options Bar, click Edit.
12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.
NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

14 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.
15 Select all framing and columns.
NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections.
16 Press DELETE.
Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted.
Add cantilever beams and outriggers
17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

19 On the Type Selector, select UB-Universal Beam: 356x171x51UB.
20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage.
Duplicating Framing | 169

■ Click OK.
23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.
Extend the shaft to roof level

25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4.
26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

■ Click OK.
Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area.
31 Draw a pick box around the entire model.

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other),
Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK.
36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK.
Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in
the next training file.

39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 171.
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab

In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified
slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a
shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation.
In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7.
Training File
Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 171

Open the roof framing section view
1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof.
2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.
Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage.
Create new roof type
4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 75mm Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation,
and click Edit/New.
9 In the Name dialog, enter 75 mm Metal Roof Deck - 100 mm Rigid Insulation, and click OK.
11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 1075
mm, and click OK.
Trace the outline of the roof
structure.
15 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 150 mm for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside
of the beam.
17 Enter ZF.
18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

19 On the Toolbar, click (Trim).
20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional
line to complete the roof outline.
Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.
21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.
Edit the slab

24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit.
26 Select specific supports.

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional
line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab.
section view.
Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab.
Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab
33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.
34 On the Options Bar, click (Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.
NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected
support location lines.
36 On the Design bar, click Modify.

38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports.

40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab.
■ For type, select 75mm Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul
■ Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 875 mm.
■ Click OK.

44 Select specific supports.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified
slab.


Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab.
Draw split line to slope the variable layer
51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.
52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected.
53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.
54 Sketch a split line.
55 Press ESC.
56 Select the split line that was just created.
57 On the Options Bar, enter 125 mm for Elevation.
58 Press ENTER.

60 Enter ZF.
Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support.
Join the geometry of the roof types
63 On the Toolbar, click (Join Geometry).

64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof.
65 Select the tapered roof, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.


68 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 182.
Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab

In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium, using the slab shape edit
tools.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab.rvt.
Open the plan view

2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing.

3 Select the atrium curved slab.
Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar.
4 On the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

The edge of the curved slab highlights, and is available for modification.
Sketch split lines

6 Click the center point of the slab arc.
Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 183

7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab.
Place a single drainage point
8 On the Options Bar, click (Add New Points).

9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line.

Place additional points
10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab.

12 Select the curved slab.
Notice that the shape edit points display.
Delete split lines

14 Select the split lines, and press DELETE.

Set drainage point elevation
15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension, and enter -150 mm.
The general shape of the curved slab displays.
View the atrium slab in 3D
17 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof.
Notice that the edges of the curved slab display.

View section view of slab
18 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Building Sections), double-click Section 3.
19 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the
section view.
Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point.
Set the curved edge condition

21 Select the slab.

23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Slab Shape Edit, for Curved Edge Condition, click
Conform to Curve.
24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog, click Project to side, and click OK.

Complete the slab geometry


29 Click the center drainage point, enter SX (Snap to Point), and select the left endpoint of the
curved slab.
30 Click the center drainage point, enter SX, and select the right endpoint of the curved slab.

Verify the slab spot elevation

34 Select the atrium curved slab.

36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0 mm.

View the completed slab section
section view.
Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface.

40 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Miter Joins on page 190.
Adding Miter Joins

In this exercise, you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins.rvt.
View the roof frame

1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - View.
2 Select the slab.

3 On the View Control Bar, select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.
The slab is now hidden.
4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame.
Add the miter join
5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame.
6 On the Options Bar, click (Edit Beam Joins).

You can now use the Beam Join Editor. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are
available for edit.
Adding Miter Joins | 191

7 Click the arrow control on the first beam.
8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.

The miter join is complete.
9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join.
The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View).
Adding Miter Joins | 193

View the miter join in coarse view
10 On the View Control Bar, select Detail Level: Coarse.
Notice the miter lock remains locked.
11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line.
Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined.
12 On the View Control Bar, select Detail Level: Fine.

Notice the miter lock remains locked.

15 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Curved Beams on page 195.
Adding Curved Beams

In this exercise, you add a curved beam to the atrium.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams.rvt.
Zoom in on the atrium

2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the atrium.
Adding Curved Beams | 195

Place the curved beams

4 In the Type Selector, select UB - Universal Beam: 356x171x51UB.
5 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and click .

6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point.
7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint.

8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

The beam is placed.
9 Press ESC twice.

10 Using the same method, place additional curved beams between the atrium columns.
Set the curved beam properties
11 Select one of the curved beams.

12 While pressing CTRL, select the remaining curved beams.

■ Under Constraints, enter -413 mm for Start Level Offset
■ Under Constraints, enter -413 mm for End Level Offset
■ For z-Direction Justification, select Top.
■ Scroll down to Analytical Model, and for Vertical Projection, select Top of Beam.
■ Click OK.
View the analytical model of the curved beams
15 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click 3D - Atrium.

16 Select the floor, and on the View Control Bar, select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.
17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible.
Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of
beam.
Add a beam system to the atrium

19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar, click Beam System.

■ Under Constraints, select 3D.
■ For Elevation, enter 0 mm.
■ Under Pattern, for Layout Rule, select Maximum Spacing.
■ For Maximum Spacing, enter 1828 mm.
■ For Beam Type, select UB - Universal Beam: 356x171x51UB.
■ Click OK.
22 Select the bottom beam.

The beam system is placed.
23 Using the same method, place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium.

Approximate the curve of the analytical model
24 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams.
25 Select the beam, and on the Options Bar, click .

■ Under Analytical Model, select Approximate Curve.
■ Select Use hard-points.
■ For Maximum discretized offset, enter 100 mm.
■ Click OK.
NOTE When hard-points are enabled, the analytical model will end at points on the curve where
other framing members are joined. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum
Discretized Offset parameter.
27 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click 3D - Atrium.

28 Select the floor, and on the View Control Bar, select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.

29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible.
Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single
curved line.

31 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding an Opening on page 202.
Adding an Opening
In this exercise, you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway, you then copy the
opening to each level.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Openings.rvt.
2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the stairway.

3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Door.
4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown.

6 Select the door opening.
Adding an Opening | 203

.
9 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 2.
10 While pressing SHIFT, select Level 7, so that levels 2-7 are highlighted.
11 Click OK.
12 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, select 3D View.
13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible.
14 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the
stairway.

16 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 205.
Adding an Opening in a Beam

In this exercise, you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening.
You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. Finally, you import
the revised beam back into the project.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam.rvt.
Add an opening (by face) to a single beam

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D View.
2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Opening by Face.
4 Select the beam that requires the opening.
Adding an Opening in a Beam | 205

Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system.
5 Using the sketch tools, draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown.
Make sure the opening forms a closed loop.
Add stiffener plates to the opening
7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar, click Component.

8 In the Type Selector, select M_Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard.
9 Using the sketch tool, draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening.

Change the stiffener plate properties
11 While pressing CTRL, select both stiffener plates.

■ Under Dimensions, for d, enter 50 mm.
■ Click OK.

15 Continue with the next exercise, Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 207.
Adding an Opening to a Beam Family

In this exercise, you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. You then modify the beam by
adding an opening. Finally, you load the new family into the project.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam.rvt.
Select the beam

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D View.
2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor.
Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 207

3 Select the beam.
Open the beam family
4 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.

5 In the Revit dialog, click Yes to open the UB- Universal Beam beam type for editing.
The beam is displayed in a new window.
Add an opening by extrusion
6 In the Family Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1), and double-click
Front.
The Front elevation of the beam is displayed.
7 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam.
8 On the Family Design Bar, click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.
9 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a New Work Plane, click Name, and select Reference
Plane: Center (Front/Back).
10 Click OK
11 On the Options Bar, click located to the left of Offset, and click (Circle).
12 Click the centerline of the beam, and draw a circle approximately as shown.
13 Press ESC.

14 On the Family Design Bar, click Modify.
15 Select the circle, and on the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog, select the Center Mark Visible parameter, and click OK.
The centerline of the circle is now visible.
17 On the Options Bar, click (Align).

18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane, and the select the centerline of the circle.
19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle.
20 Press ESC.
21 On the Options Bar, click (Align).

22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane, and select the centerline of the circle.
23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle.
NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will
remain in the center of the beam, regardless of the length.

26 Select the circle on the beam.

The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder.
27 On the View Control toolbar, select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges.
Extrude the opening
28 Click the right directional arrow, and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes
through the beam.

30 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the revised beam family file as UB-Universal
Beam with Opening.rfa.
Load the modified beam family into the project
31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
32 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam.rvt located in the project
file, and click OK.
The project file reopens.
33 Enter ZF.
34 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors.
35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2.
36 While pressing CTRL, select the beams for Levels 2 through 4.
Select the new beam family
37 In the Type Selector, select the modified beam type UB-Universal Beam with Opening:
356x171x51UB.
38 Click in the drawing area.

The modified beams with openings display.

40 Continue with the next exercise, Adding Foundation Walls on page 212.
Adding Foundation Walls

In this exercise, you add structural walls. You add these walls using the Ground Level view, and walls are
generated downward to the foundation.
Training File
In this new training file, the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. In addition, a roof with
tapered insulation has been added over Level 7.

Sketch the atrium walls
The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you.

3 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Foundation - 300 mm Concrete.

■ Under Constraints, for Location Line, select Wall Centerline.
■ For Top Offset, enter -150 mm.
■ Click OK.

7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file.
Adding Foundation Walls | 213

A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline.
Sketch the remaining foundation walls
8 On the Options Bar, click , and select Chain.

9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining
perimeter of the model. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay
to trace over.
On portions of the south wall, you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments.
10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch.

11 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D View.
12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible.

14 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 215.
Adding Piers or Pilasters

In this exercise, you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_Piers.rvt.
Add concrete piers

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Column.
3 In the Type Selector, select M_Concrete-Square-Column: 450 x 450 mm.
4 In the Options Bar, select Foundation for Depth.
5 Within the perimeter of the structure model, add a concrete column centered on each steel
column location.
TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. If you select all the grid lines and
add columns to all intersections, make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter.
In addition, you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line, such
as the atrium.
Concrete pier centered on

steel column

8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls, press TAB, and select the foundation wall
chain.
9 On the View Control Bar, click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element.
Adding Piers or Pilasters | 215

This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers.
10 On the View Control Bar, click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

The foundation wall is displayed.

12 Proceed to the next exercise, Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 216.
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels

In this exercise, you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs, sloped slabs, and concrete beam
framing.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_CSM_7.rvt
Frame ground and parking levels

■ For Type, select Insitu Concrete 225 mm.
■ For Height Offset From Level, enter 0.
■ Click OK.

6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. If necessary, use the flip controls to toggle to
the exterior face.
TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain.
7 Click Finish Sketch.
NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to
its bottom, click Yes.
WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component, click Delete Type.

9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible.
Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 217

Frame concrete girders

12 In the Type Selector, select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam:400 x 800 mm.
13 On the Options Bar, click Grid.
14 Select all grid lines.
15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT, select the line.
This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3.
NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined, expand the warning and select
the framing element. It will display as selected in the drawing area. It is most likely a segment that
can be deleted or unjoined. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution.
17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4, and another between G4 and G5.
18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium.
19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2.


Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1
21 Drag a pick box around the entire model.

23 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, Other) and Floors,
and then click OK.
26 In the Select Levels dialog, select Garage Level -1, and click OK.
28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible.
NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible.

Add the garage entrance exit ramp
30 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Garage Level -1.
31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and click Hidden Line.
32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model.
35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure.
36 On the Design Bar, click Slope Arrow.

37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right.
38 Right-click the slope arrow, and select Element Properties.

■ Under Constraints, select Ground Level for Level at Tail.
■ For Height Offset at Tail, enter 0.
■ For Height Offset at Head, enter 150 mm.
■ For Level at Head, select Garage Level-1.
■ Click OK.

41 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South Elevation.
43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp.

Completed ramp
Add a sloped beam system under the ramp
45 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the ramp.
46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar, click Beam System.
47 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
48 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a plane, and click OK.
49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp.
50 On the Design Bar, select Structural Beam System Properties.

■ Under Beam Type, select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 300x600.
■ Under Pattern, select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value.
■ For Value, under Number of Lines, enter 5.
■ Click OK.
52 In the Project Browser, under Structural Views, select Ground Level.
53 On the View toolbar, click , and zoom in on the ramp.

55 Draw an outline of the ramp.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab.
58 On the View toolbar, click , and zoom in on the ramp.
Add a wall opening at the garage entrance
59 On the View toolbar, click , and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp.
60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Wall Opening.
61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp.
When you are adding a wall opening, there are no drawing tools to select. You can immediately
draw the rectangular opening.
62 Sketch the opening, corner to corner.

NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening, you may get a warning message that elements
cannot remain joined. In this case, click Unjoin Elements, and continue with the next step.

64 Select the garage opening.
Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls.

66 Proceed to the final exercise, Placing a Wall Foundation on page 223.
Placing a Wall Foundation

In this exercise, you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. In
addition, you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers.
Placing a Wall Foundation | 223

Training File
Metric\m_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation.rvt.
Sketch the continuous foundation

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Foundation.
2 Enter ZF.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Foundation ➤ Wall.
4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls, press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted,
and click to select the foundation wall chain.
A continuous foundation is added.

Edit foundation properties
6 Select one of the foundation walls.

9 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ Under Dimensions, for Toe length, enter 450 mm.
■ For Heel length, enter 450 mm.
■ For Foundation Thickness, enter 450 mm.
■ Click OK twice.
Place isolated foundation
10 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.

11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Visibility, clear Structural Framing, and click OK.
13 In the Type Selector, select Footing-Rectangular: 1800x1200x450 mm.
14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each
location.

You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. You can save the open file if you
wish. In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied.
18 Proceed to the next tutorial, Precast Concrete on page 227.
Placing a Wall Foundation | 225

226
Precast Concrete
6
In this tutorial, you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Autodesk Revit Structure 2009.
In the first lesson, you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. You then modify the precast beam type
within the Revit Structure family editor.
Creating a Precast Beam System

In this lesson, you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure.
Adding a Beam System to the Structure

In this exercise, you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Precast_Concrete.rvt.

227
4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Pattern, do the following:
■ For Layout Rule, select Clear Spacing.
■ For Clear Spacing, enter 50 mm.
■ For Justification, select Center.
■ For Beam Type, select Precast-Double Tee: 1200 x 450 mm.
■ Click OK.
5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown.
NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. The longitudinal axis of the beam system
members will be placed parallel to these lines.
The beam system is displayed.
8 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the model to a location of your choice using the following
filename: m_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt.
228 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete

9 Proceed to the next exercise, Changing the Beam System Properties on page 229.
Changing the Beam System Properties

In this exercise, you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete
support beam.
Training File
■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise, m_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt.
1 On the View Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as
shown.
Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam.
2 Click one of the precast beams as shown.
3 Right-click the selected beam, and click Select All Instances.
Changing the Beam System Properties | 229

5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Construction, for Start and End Extension, enter 150
mm, and click OK.
The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam.

7 Proceed to the next exercise, Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 230.
Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing

In this exercise, you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam.
Training File
■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise, m_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt
Notice the spacing between each precast beam.

3 Select the beam system.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Construction, for Clear Spacing, enter 0 mm, and click
OK.
Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed.

8 Proceed to the next lesson, Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 231.
Modifying the Precast Beam Family

In this lesson, you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family.
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam

In this exercise, you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports.
You then import the revised beam back into the project.
Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 231

Training File
■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise, m_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt.
Open the beam type for editing

1 Click one of the precast beams as shown.

3 In the Revit dialog, click Yes to open the M_Precast-Double Tee Family for editing.
The beam is displayed in a new window.
4 In the Family Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1), and double-click
Left.
5 Select the beam.

Open the beam profile
6 In the Family Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile.

7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile, and click Edit.
8 In the Revit dialog, click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing.
9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics.
10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, click the Annotations Categories tab.
■ Under Visibility, click Dimensions and Reference Planes.
■ Click Apply, and then click OK.
The reference planes and dimensions are now visible.
Zoom in on the left tee of the beam
11 On the View Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam.
NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for
this demo.
12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length, and drag them above the top
horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown.
Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 233

Draw horizontal reference plane
13 On the Design bar, click Ref Plane.

14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane, and click Modify.
15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 50 mm.
16 Press ESC.
17 Select the horizontal reference plane.

19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Options, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and
click OK.
Draw vertical reference planes
20 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown.

22 Press ESC.
23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 50 mm.
24 Press ESC.
25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown.
26 While pressing CTRL, select both vertical reference planes.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Options, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and
click OK.
Add dimensions to each reference plane
29 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.

30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane, and click the lock symbol next to the
dimension to lock the distance.

31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown.
32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown.
NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal
line of the beam.
33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance.
34 Press ESC.
Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam
35 On the View Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam.
36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam, and drag the end point away from the angled
line as shown.

37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align).
38 For the align-to point, select the vertical reference plane as shown.
39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown.
Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane.
40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

41 Press ESC.
42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee.
Sketch new profile
43 Select the angled line as shown.

44 Press DELETE.
45 On the Design bar, click Lines.
46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows:
■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane.
■ Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.
■ Snap to the end of the top horizontal line.
47 Press ESC.
48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam.

Modify the right tee of the beam
49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).

50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown.
51 On the View Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam.

52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam.
■ Draw vertical reference planes.
■ Add dimensions to each reference plane.
■ Align the bottom horizontal surface.
■ Sketch the new profile.
Flex the design
53 On the Design bar, click Family Types.

54 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ For Tee Width, enter 1500 mm.
■ For Width, enter 3000 mm.
The beam should adapt to all changes. If it does not, fix any problems with alignment or
constraints.
55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes.
Reload the family into the project
56 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.

57 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes.
58 Proceed to the next tutorial, Creating Drawings on page 241.

Creating Drawings
7
In this tutorial, you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Autodesk Revit Structure 2009.
To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model, begin by first creating sheets, which
are a type of view in a project. Sheets are defined by borders, usually contain a title block, and are accessible from the
Project Browser. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create, you can add different views of the model
directly to the sheet. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan, section, elevation, and three-dimensional
(3D) views.
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project

In this lesson, you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project, how to add views to the sheets,
and how to create new views from a model. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used
in the previous lesson.
Creating a Drawing Sheet

In this exercise, you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view, 3D view, and section views. Sheet
views update automatically when you modify your model.
241
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Drawings.rvt.
Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet
1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information.

2 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit for Project Address.
3 In the Edit Text dialog box, enter the following address: 123 Main Street, Anytown, MA 12345.
4 Click OK.
5 Specify the remaining instance parameters:
■ For Project Issue Date, enter 31 March 2006.
■ For Project Status, enter Initial Draft.
■ For Client Name, enter J. Smith.
■ For Project Name, enter Office Structure.
■ For Project Number, enter 2006-01.
6 Click OK.
Create a sheet
TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar, right-click, and click View.
8 In the Select a Title block dialog box, select A1 metric, and click OK.
A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The
text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the
corresponding project information that you entered.
242 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates
every time the project file is saved.

The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 - Unnamed.
Change the sheet name and number in the title block
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the title block.
11 When the title block highlights, on the Options Bar, click .

■ Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name, enter Plans and Elevations.
■ Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number, enter S-1.
13 Click OK.
The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser.
Add a plan view to the sheet
14 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.

15 In the Views dialog box, select Structural Plan: Level 2, and click Add View to Sheet.
16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet, and click to place the view.
Creating a Drawing Sheet | 243

17 With the view selected, right-click, and click Element Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, specify 1:200 for View Scale, and click
OK.
The scale of the view on the sheet changes. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2,
right-click, and click View Properties, you would see that the scale plan view is now 1:200.
19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet.

20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view, and dragging the right end control until
it fits under the view.
NOTE If necessary, you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.
Add an elevation to the sheet

22 In the Views dialog box, select Elevation: South Elevation, and click Add View to Sheet.
23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view.
24 With the view selected, right-click, and click Element Properties.
■ Under Graphics, specify 1:200 for View Scale.
■ Under Extents, clear Crop View.
■ Click OK.
26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2.

27 Drag the title line under the elevation view.

Add a 3D view to the sheet

30 In the Views dialog box, select 3D View: East Section - Perspective, and click Add View to Sheet.
31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view.

34 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as m_RST_Drawings-in progress.rvt.
35 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 246.
Creating a Drawing Sheet | 245

Adding a Sheet to the Project
In this exercise, you add a new sheet to the project, add a section view, and adjust the scale of the view.
end of that exercise, m_RST_Drawings-in progress.rvt.
Add a new sheet to the project

2 In the Select a Title block dialog box, select A1 metric, and click OK.
3 Select the title block, and on the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, enter Section Views for Sheet Name,
and click OK.
Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name.
The new sheet, incrementally named S-2 Section Views, is displayed in the Project Browser,
under Sheets (all).

6 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 246.
Creating New Views to Add to Sheets

In this exercise, you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view, and then add them to
a new drawing sheet.

Create a section view of Level 2, and add it to the sheet

1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2.
2 On the View Toolbar, click , and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown.

4 On the Options Bar, select 1:200 for Scale.
5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building:
■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section
head (section tag).
Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 247

■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail
and complete the section line.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click S-2 Section Views.
8 In the Views dialog box, select Section: Section 1, and click Add View to Sheet.
9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view.
10 With the view selected, right-click, and click Properties.
11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, specify 1:100 for View Scale.
12 Drag the title line under the elevation view, and click OK.
13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.
Create a callout view, and add it to the sheet
14 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Building Sections), double click Section 1.

15 On the View Toolbar, click , and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure.
16 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1, as shown.
18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon, and position it approximately as shown.
19 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click S-2 Section Views.
20 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Building Sections), click Callout of section 1, and drag
the view onto the sheet.
21 With the view selected, right-click, and click Properties.
22 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, specify 1:50 for View Scale, and click OK.
23 Drag the title line under the elevation view.
24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.
Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 249


26 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating a Detail Library on page 250.
Creating a Detail Library

In this lesson, you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different
projects.
Creating a Drafting View Detail Library

In this exercise, you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. Instead of
having to draw these details for every project, you will learn how to save both the individual views and
complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Save_Detail.rvt.
Save a group of views to the library

1 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click S.1 - TYPICAL DETAILS.

Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet.
2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views.

3 In the Save Views dialog, select Drawing Sheet: S.1 - TYPICAL DETAILS, and click OK.
4 In the Save As dialog:

■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members.
■ Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder.
■ Enter Detail Library for the folder name.
■ Open the new folder.
Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 251

■ Under File name, enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details.
■ Click Save.
Save individual views to the library
5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views.

6 In the Save Views dialog, do the following:
■ In the list of views, clear Drawing Sheet: S.1 - TYPICAL DETAILS.
■ Under Views, select Show drafting views only.

Only the drafting views will be displayed.
■ Select both Footing Section views.
■ Click OK.

■ Under Save in, navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4.
■ For File name, enter Footing Section.
■ Click Save.
NOTE When you save your file, Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects; however,
when you insert these views into a new project, only the 2D elements will be inserted.

9 Proceed to the next exercise, Importing Details from the Library on page 253.

Importing Details from the Library
In this exercise, you learn how import details from the newly created library.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Insert_Detail.rvt.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise, Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on
page 250 before proceeding.
Insert drawing sheet from the library
1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.

2 In the Open dialog:
■ For Look in, select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise.
■ Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS.rvt.
■ Click Open.
3 In the Insert Views dialog:

■ Select Drawing Sheet: S.1 - TYPICAL DETAILS.
■ Click OK.
Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project, a duplicate types
dialog displays. Click OK.
4 Once the drawing sheet opens, close the warning dialog that appears.
Importing Details from the Library | 253

5 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click S.1 - TYPICAL DETAILS.
Insert separate footing sections from the library

7 In the Open dialog, do the following:
■ For Look in, select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.
■ Select the file FOOTING SECTION.rvt.
■ Click Open.

■ Under Views, select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION.

■ Click OK.
dialog appears. Click OK.

10 In the Open dialog:
■ For Look in, select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.
■ Select the file Footing Sections.rvt.

■ Click Open.

■ Under Views, select Drafting View: Footing Section 2.
■ Click OK.
dialog appears. Click OK.

You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of
the structural team. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire
detail sheet into an existing project.
13 Proceed to the next lesson, Using Legends on page 258.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a
project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation
legends and building component legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that
identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.
Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. On construction documents,
component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule, concrete schedule, and so on).
Creating a Symbol Legend

In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it, using a text type you create by
duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol
legend to a sheet for the construction documents.

Create a legend view
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

2 In the Project Browser, expand Legends.
3 Right-click Legend 1, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Symbol Legend for Name, and click OK.
Add symbols to the legend
5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol.

6 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing
it in the drawing area as shown.
■ M_Section Head - Filled
■ M_Span Direction Fixed: 12.5mm
■ M_Rebar Tag
■ M_Grid head - Circle
■ M_Spot Elevation: Exterior Filled
■ M_View Title
Creating a Symbol Legend | 259

Create a text type
7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a
text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying
the type properties.
On the Design Bar, click Text.
8 In the Type Selector, select Text: 5mm Arial.
9 On the Options bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate, enter 3mm for Name, and click OK.
12 Under Text, enter 3mm for Text Size, and click OK twice.
Add text to the legend
13 In the Type Selector, verify that Text: 3mm is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol
to specify the text start point.
14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note.

15 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ Span Direction Fixed: 12.5mm
■ Rebar Tag
■ Grid Head Circle
■ Spot Elevation: Exterior Fixed
■ View Name/scale
Place the symbol legend on a sheet
16 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click S-1 - Plans and Elevations to open
it in the drawing area.
17 In the Project Browser, click Symbol Legend, drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet, and
click to place it.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command.
Creating a Symbol Legend | 261

The symbol legend is added to the sheet.

20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied.
21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 263.

Scheduling
8
In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Autodesk Revit
Structure 2009 projects.
Scheduling Beam Quantities

In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you
schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an
instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).
Creating a Structural Framing Schedule

In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.
Create the schedule

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK.
Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule
3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add.
The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields.
263
5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ Comments
■ Reference Level
■ Family and Type
NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating
Shared Parameters.
6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name.
■ Under Type of Parameter, select Text.
■ Click OK.
NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural
framing components including beams.
8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or
Move Down.
9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK.

A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.
264 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 265.
Creating Shared Parameters

In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not
included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be
added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency
across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure
multi-category schedules.
An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete
beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family
parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for
this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Schedules.rvt.
Editing the family parameters

NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool.
2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.
Creating Shared Parameters | 265

4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing.
NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area.
5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types.

6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.
7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select.
8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes.
9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create.
10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for
name. Click Save.
11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New.
12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK.
13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New.
■ Under Name, enter b.

■ Under Type of Parameter, select Length.
■ Click OK.
15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New.

■ Under Name, enter h.
■ Under Type of Parameter, select Length.
■ Click OK.
17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK.

18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK.
19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK.
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify.
21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select.
22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK.
23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK.
24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK.
NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters.
They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file.
25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project.

26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes.
Remove Family and Type parameter
27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and
select Properties.
28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and
click Remove.
The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column.
Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule
30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add.
The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields.
Move Down.
Creating Shared Parameters | 267

35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 268.
Creating a Type Schedule

In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.
Modify the table elements

1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule.
2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ Select Mark, and enter MARK.
■ Select b (Width), and enter W.
■ Select h (Depth), and enter D.
■ Select Comments, and enter REMARKS.
■ Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.
NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has
changed.
3 Select headings W and D.

4 On the Options bar, click Group.

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D.
5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.
Select a filter
6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ Click the Filter tab.
■ Select Reference Level for Filter by.
■ Select Ground Level.
■ Click OK.

Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground
level.
Format units
10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties.
11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.
12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab.
13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format.
14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ Clear Use project settings.
■ Under Units, select Millimeters.
■ Under Rounding, select 2 decimal places.
Creating a Type Schedule | 269

■ Click OK.
15 Using the same method, format units for field h.

Columns W and D now display 2 decimal places.
Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule
18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam
Schedule, and select Properties.
19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add.
The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields.
Move Down.

The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.
Sort by Structural Usage
26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value.
27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ Under Sort by, select Structural Usage.
■ Select Header.
■ Select Footer.
■ Select Blank Line.
Creating a Type Schedule | 271

■ Click OK.

The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural
usage.

30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 273.

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by
mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.
Add mark data

2 On the Window menu, click Tile.
The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground
Level view.
NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam
family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file.
3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

■ Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value.
■ Click OK.
NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values.
The schedule is updated with the joist information.
Customizing the Type Schedule | 273


■ Click OK.


■ Click OK.

Sort and filter the schedule by mark
12 Maximize the schedule window.

14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value.
■ Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals.
■ Under Sort by, select Mark.
16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:
■ Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

■ Click OK.

Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the
beams of the same mark in a single row.
Hide/unhide columns
■ Under Fields, select Reference Level.
■ Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field.
■ Click OK.

The Reference Level column is now hidden.
NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All
Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide
Column(s) from the drop-down menu.
Rename existing rebar parameter

■ Under Fields, select REBAR.
■ Under Heading, enter Bottom Bars.
■ Click OK.

The Rebar field is renamed.
Add new rebar parameter
27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Fields, click Edit for Value.
28 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter.
■ Under Parameter Data, enter Top Bars for Name.
■ Under Type of Parameter, select Text.
■ Click OK.
This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. Rebar
will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog.
Move Down.

The new rebar field is added.

Group rebar columns
33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings.

34 On the Options bar, click Group.
A new blank cell is created above the columns.
35 Click the new heading, and enter REBAR.
Enter rebar data
36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows:
■ For Joists B1, under Bottom Bars, enter 2-#7A 1-#7B, and under Top Bars, enter 2-#5 C.
■ For Joists B2, under Bottom Bars, enter 2-#6A 1-#6B, and under Top Bars, select 2-#5C.
■ For Joists B3, under Bottom Bars, enter 2-#5A 1-#5B, and under Top Bars, select2-#5C.

38 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Instance Schedule on page 279.
Creating an Instance Schedule

In this exercise, you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance, as well as the total
cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Formula.rvt.
Create the formula

1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam
Schedule.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under the Fields parameter, click Edit for Value.
Creating an Instance Schedule | 279

■ Under Available Fields, select Volume, and click Add.
■ Under Available Fields, select Cost, and click Add.
■ Click Calculated Value.
5 In the Calculated Value dialog, do the following:

■ Enter Total Cost for Name.
■ Select Number for Type.
■ Enter Volume*Cost/1m^3 for Formula.

Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic meter.
■ Click OK.

8 Under Joist B1, enter 3 for Cost, and press ENTER.
Because cost is a type parameter, the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. The
schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists.

NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. Also notice
that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned.
9 Under Joist B2, enter 1.5 for Cost, and press ENTER.
■ Click the Formatting tab.
■ Under Fields, select Total Cost.
■ Under Field Formatting, select Calculate totals.
■ Click OK.

The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost.
Format total cost to include currency value
■ Click the Formatting tab.
■ Under Fields, select Total Cost.
■ Under Field formatting, click Field Format.
■ In the Format dialog, clear Use default settings.
■ Under Units, select Currency.
■ Under Rounding, select 2 Decimal Places.
■ Under Unit Symbol, select $.
■ Click OK.
Creating an Instance Schedule | 281

The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars.

close the exercise file without saving changes. The next lesson uses a new training file.
20 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 282.
Creating a Graphical Column Schedule

In this lesson, you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project.
Create the Graphical Column Schedule

In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS.rvt.
Create the schedule

1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Graphical Column Schedule.
The schedule is created automatically.

2 Right-click the column schedule, and select View Properties.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, click Edit for Hidden Levels.
4 In the Levels Hidden dialog, select Foundation, Garage Level - 1, and Ground Level, and click
OK.
NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule.
6 On the Toolbar, click , and zoom in on the schedule.

Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2.
Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 283

NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below.
The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between
the grid and column.
Columns located at off-grid locations
Columns displayed in plan view
Grouping and formatting off-grid columns
7 Right-click the schedule, and select View Properties.

■ Under Graphics, select Group Similar Locations, and for Grid Appearance, click Edit.
■ In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog, under Horizontal Widths, For Column
Locations, enter 75 mm, under Vertical Heights, for Below Bottom Level, enter 75 mm, and
click OK.

■ In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single
column.
Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations
In the graphical column schedule view, you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and
Group Similar Locations, and click OK.
Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections.

Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 285

12 Proceed to the next exercise, Change the Schedule Appearance on page 286.
Change the Schedule Appearance

In this exercise, you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic
appearance.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS.rvt.
Customize text
1 In the Project Browser, under Graphical Column Schedules, double-click Graphical Column
Schedule 1.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Text Appearance, click Edit for Value.
4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ For Title text, select Courier New from the drop-down list, and then select Bold and Italic.
■ For Level text, select Arial Black from the drop-down list, and then select Bold.
5 Click the Grid Appearance tab.

6 Under Horizontal Widths:
■ Enter 50 mm for Column Locations,
■ Enter 50 mm for Level Names.

7 Click OK.
8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Steel Column Schedule for Title.
9 Click OK.
Tag the columns

11 On the Options bar, click Vertical, and clear Leader.
12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag.
13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, do the following:
■ Under Category, select M_Structural Column Tag.
■ Under Orientation, select Vertical.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.
Change the Schedule Appearance | 287

15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area.
16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule.

18 In the Filter dialog, clear Structural Columns, and click OK.
19 On the Toolbar, click , and zoom in on one of the column tags.
20 On the Toolbar, click , and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown.

Split the column schedule

22 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following;
■ Under View Scale, enter 1:100.
■ Under Column Locations per Segment, enter 10.
23 Click OK.
The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment.

25 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on
page 290.
Change the Schedule Appearance | 289

Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule
In this exercise, you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS.rvt.
Create a sheet
2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select A1 metric, and click OK.
A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.

The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser.
Change the sheet name and number
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the titleblock.

■ Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name, enter Steel Column Schedule.
■ Under Sheet Number, enter S-3.
■ Click OK.
The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser.
Add the column schedule to the sheet
7 On the View tab of the Design bar, click Add View.

8 In the Views dialog, select Graphical Column Schedule, and click Add View to Sheet.
10 Select the schedule, and on the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, enter 1 for Segments in Viewport, and click
OK.

The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3.
Add additional sheets

13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select A1 metric, click OK.

■ Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name, select Steel Column Schedule.
■ Under Sheet Number, enter S-4.
■ Click OK.
17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets.

Enter Steel Column Schedule for name, and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers.
Place remaining views
18 On the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click Sheet S-4.
19 On the Project Browser, under Graphical Column Schedule, click Graphical Column Schedule
1, and drag it onto the sheet.
21 Position the schedule as necessary.
22 On the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click Sheet S-5
25 On the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click Sheet S-6.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 292.
Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 291

Exporting Project Information with ODBC
In this lesson, you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) -
compliant database.
Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access

In this exercise, you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. The
process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info.rvt.
Export the schedule
1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database.

2 In the Select Data Source dialog, click the File Data Source tab.
3 Click New.
4 In the Create New Data Source dialog, select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb), and click Next.
5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN, and click Next.
6 Click Finish.
7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog, under Database, click Create.
8 In the New Database dialog, under Database Name, enter Revit_Project.mdb.
9 Under Directories, select a location for the database file, and click OK to create the database.
10 When the confirmation message displays, click OK.
11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog, click OK.
12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs, and then open the database in Microsoft Access.
Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project, and one
that lists all of the element types in a project (see below).
A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements, so that each table of elements includes
an ID column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different

tables. For example, instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s
type, and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that
the instance is in.

close the exercise file without saving changes. The next tutorial uses a new training file.
14 Proceed to the next tutorial, Steel Details on page 295.
Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 293

294
Steel Details
9
In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model
(model-based), and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). Detail drawings describe how
particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process
after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. This tutorial comprises the following
model-based steel detail exercises:
■ Welded Brace Connection

■ Bolted Angle Connection
■ Glazing Support Connection
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets

In this lesson, you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. You cut a section in plan, revise
an existing elevation view, revise a callout view, and add these views to a sheet.
Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets

Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_DET.rvt.
Prepare the welded brace elevation view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), Structural Plans, and double-click Level 4.
2 Select , and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown.
295
3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view.
4 In the elevation view, select the elevation crop view, and drag the controls to resize such that
only the Level 4 area is visible.
■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.
Create the section view
7 Select , and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E.
296 | Chapter 9 Steel Details

9 Draw a section as shown.

11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.
12 Select the section crop view, and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible.
Revise the callout view
14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click West Elevation.
A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall.
15 Select , and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4.

16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view.
Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 297

Create a sheet and place the section, elevation, and callout views on the sheet
18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

19 In the Select a Title block dialog, select A1 Metric, and click OK.
21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed, and click Rename.
22 In the Sheet Title dialog, enter Steel Details for Name, and click OK.
23 In the Project Browser, right-click S-6 - Steel Details, and click Add View.
24 In the Views dialog, select Section: Section 1, and click Add View to Sheet.
25 Move the cursor onto the sheet, and click to place the view.
27 In the Views dialog, select Elevation: Elevation 1-a, and click Add View to Sheet.
30 In the Views dialog, select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation, and click Add View to Sheet.

file name: m_RST_DET-in progress.rvt.
33 Proceed to the next lesson, Detailing Steel on page 299.
Detailing Steel
In this lesson, you add a welded bracing detail, a bolted angle detail, and a facade support detail to the
model.
Creating a Welded Bracing Detail

Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_RST_DET-in progress.rvt.
The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. You
will sketch the lines in a model view.
Sketch line work

1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Interior Elevation), double click Elevation 1-a.
2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the
braces meet at Level 4.
Detailing Steel | 299

3 Select the left brace, and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move
the brace so it is not touching the beam flange.
4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.

5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam, and enter SM to snap to the midpoint.
6 Sketch a vertical line down 340 mm from the bottom flange as shown.
TIP After establishing the line direction, enter the value.

Next, you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line.
7 On the Options Bar, click Offset.

8 On the Options Bar, select Numerical, enter 750 mm for Offset, and select Copy.
9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it.
A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line.
10 Click to place this line.

11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side.
13 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 500 mm for the Offset value.
14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown, and click to place the detail line.
Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 301

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the horizontal detail line.
16 Enter 1150 mm for the temporary dimension value as shown.
17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Lines, and sketch 2 detail lines to connect
the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown.

18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line, and press DELETE to delete this
element.
Add weld symbols
19 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both,
drag it into the view as shown, and click to place it.
The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0.
20 Click Modify.
21 Select the weld symbol, click the left top weld annotation, and enter 9. Repeat for the left bottom
value.
22 Click the right top weld annotation, and enter a period. Repeat for the right bottom value.
23 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the weld symbol.
24 On the Options Bar, click Add a Leader.
25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown.
Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 303

26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown.
27 Right-click the new weld symbol, and click Properties.

■ Under Structural, select Weld All Around.
■ Under Graphics, select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol.
■ Click OK.

Label the angles and the plate
29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Text.

31 Draw a text leader to the plate, and enter 9 mm for text.

34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L205x205, TYPICAL for text as shown.

36 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 305.
Creating a Bolted Angle Detail

Training File
In the first part of the exercise, you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded
into the project. Then you add some annotations.
Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 305

1 In the Project Browser, under Sections, double-click Section 1.
2 In the Project Browser, under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section,
select L102x102x12.5.
3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown.
Add annotations

5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown.

8 Enter the text notes as shown.

10 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 307.
Creating a Facade Support Detail

Training File
In this exercise, you add members to support exterior wall glazing.
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click West Elevation.
2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on
Level 4 at Grid 4.
Creating a Facade Support Detail | 307

3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation.
On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. You will
attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ M_C-Channel Section, select C100x10.8.
5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area.
6 Click Modify and select the channel.

7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice, move it to the position shown, and click to
place it.
8 On the Edit toolbar, click , and select the left side of the column as shown.

9 Next, select the back of the channel as shown.
10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown.
Creating a Facade Support Detail | 309

11 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section, select the bolt, and drag
it onto the outrigger and channel as shown.
Add annotations

13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C100x10.8.
14 Click near the bolt and enter 19 mm DIA. BOLT.
15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool.
16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your
work in the sheet view.
You can save the open file if you wish. In the next lesson, a new training file is supplied.
18 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 310.
Creating a Drafting View Detail

In this lesson, you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting
tools provided in Revit Structure.

Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Deck_Span_Detail.rvt.
Create the drafting view

1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Drafting View.
2 In the New Drafting dialog, do the following:
■ Under Name, enter Typical Detail - Deck Span Transition.
■ Under Scale, select 1:10.
■ Click OK.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Drafting Views, and double-click Typical Detail - Deck Span
Transition.
Load detail components
4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, select Detail Component.

5 In the Type Selector, select UB-Universal Beam- Section: 406x178x54UB.
6 Click the drawing area to place the component.
9 In the Type Selector, select M_K-Series Bar Joist - Side: 14K3.
10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam.
Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown.
Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 311

12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, select Repeating Detail.
13 In the Type Selector, select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck.
14 Click the end of the joist.
15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck.
16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck, and continue to move the pointer to
the right until the deck is drawn as shown.

19 In the Type Selector, select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section - Section: HSS64x64x4.8.
20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as
shown.

23 In the Type Selector, select M_Roof Decking-Side: 1.5 IR 22.
24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left
approximately as shown.

27 In the Type Selector, select M_K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3.
28 Place the joist to the left of the beam, and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck
as shown.

Add weld symbols
30 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the
bottom, drag it into the view as shown, and click to place it.
32 Select the weld symbol, and on the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog, change the following instance parameters:
■ Under Structural, select Field Weld.
■ Enter 0 for Bottom Weld Size.
■ Enter 0 for Bottom Weld Length.
■ Under Other, clear Symbol Left, and select Symbol Right.
■ Click OK.
Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 313

34 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the weld symbol.
35 On the Options Bar, click Add a Leader.
36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown.
Add text to the detail view

39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text.
42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown.
43 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and navigate to a folder location of your choice.
44 Proceed to the next tutorial, Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 315.

Concrete Reinforcement
Modelling 10
In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural
project. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities
of Revit Structure. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises:
■ Reinforcement in a Beam
■ Reinforcement in a Column
■ Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall
■ Area Reinforcement in a Slab
■ Path Reinforcement in a Slab
■ Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing
■ Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall
Concrete Modelling Examples

In this lesson, you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided
with Revit Structure.
Reinforcement in a Beam
In this exercise, you model reinforcement in a concrete beam, using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library.
315
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Concrete_Reinf.rvt.
Open detail view

1 In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Detail), double-click Beam Detail.
NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Some of the rebar line
weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes.
2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located
in the center of the drawing area.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.
The Rebar Shape Browser launches, positioned to the right of the drawing area. This browser
rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar.
316 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling

NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. For training
purposes, the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. The library is located in the
Rebar Shapes folder in the Metric Library.
Place rebar parallel to the beam face
4 In the Type Selector, select Rebar Bar: 10M.

5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser, scroll down the list of available shapes, and select Rebar Shape:
M_S3.
6 Hover over the section view.

Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge.
7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar.
Reinforcement in a Beam | 317

M_T9.
9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar.

Set rebar spacing
11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps, and on the Options Bar, do the
following:
■ For Layout, select Maximum Spacing.
■ For Spacing, enter 100.0.
Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face
12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.
M_01.
14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view, approximately as shown.

M_01.

18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view, approximately as shown.

Set rebar spacing
20 Select the single rebar that you just placed, and on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For Rebar Size, select Rebar Bar: 13M.
■ For Layout, select Fixed Number.
■ For Quantity, enter 4.

Set rebar visibility
22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown.

25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog, for 3D View, select both View unobscured
and View as solid, and click OK.

View rebar in 3D

29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible.
30 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown

Notice that the rebar sets are visible.
Modify the rebar length
31 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam.
32 Select the rebar as shown.

33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required.

35 Proceed to the next exercise, Reinforcement in a Column on page 323.

Reinforcement in a Column
In this exercise, you model reinforcement in a concrete column, using the Revit Structure rebar shapes
library.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Concrete_Reinf.rvt.
Open detail view

1 In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Detail), double-click Column Detail.
2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located
in the center of the drawing area.
The Rebar Shape Browser launches, positioned to the right of the drawing area. This browser
rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar.
Reinforcement in a Column | 323

NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. For training
purposes, the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. The library is located in the
Rebar Shapes folder in the Metric Library.
Place rebar parallel to the column face

M_T1.
Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge.
7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown.

Set rebar spacing
9 Select the rebar that you just placed, and on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For Spacing, enter 100.

Place rebar perpendicular to the column face
12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser, scroll down the list of available shapes, and select Rebar
Shape: M_00.
13 Click to place a single rebar as shown.
Set rebar spacing
14 Select the single rebar, and on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For Layout, select Fixed Number.
■ For Quantity, enter 3.

Copy the rebar
16 Select the rebar.
17 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).

18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point, as shown.

19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown.
21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown.

24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog, for 3D View, select both View unobscured
and View as solid, and click OK.

View rebar in 3D

28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible.
29 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the column as shown

Notice that the rebar sets are visible.

31 Proceed to the next exercise, Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 328.
Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall

In this exercise, you model area reinforcement in a structural wall.
Training File

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Garage Level-1.
2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure.
4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown.

6 On the View Control Bar, select 1:50 for Scale.
7 In the section view, select the crop view, and drag the controls to resize the view such that only
the foundation wall is shown.
Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 329

Sketch the area reinforcement
8 Select the foundation wall.

10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. The foundation
wall will be highlighted as shown below.
11 On the Options Bar, click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode.
12 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown.

NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction.
Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. Minor bars will be placed
perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position), adjacent to the major bars. To
change the major direction, on the Design Bar, click Major Direction Edge, and select one of the
horizontal lines of the outline.

The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall, and is indicated
on the 3D view with an X as shown.

The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed.
Remove the major bars
15 Select the area reinforcement.

Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the
reinforcement.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Layers, clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and
Interior Major Direction, and click OK.

Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section
view, and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall.
Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction, and click OK.
Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Construction, for Value, select Fixed Number.
19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Layers, do the following:
■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines, enter 30.
■ For Exterior Minor Number of Lines, enter 30.
■ For Interior Major Number of Lines, enter 30.
■ For Interior Minor Number of Lines, enter 30.
■ Click OK.

Notice that additional bars are added to the section view.

Change bar type
21 Select the Area Reinforcement.

23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Layers, change all Bar Types to 13M, and click OK.
Add annotation
24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area, and click Zoom to Fit.
26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag.
28 Using the drag control, move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown.

30 Proceed to the next exercise, Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 337.
Area Reinforcement in a Slab

In this exercise, you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Garage Level-1.
2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north
side of the structure as shown.
Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 337

4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown.
5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.

6 On the View Control Bar, do the following:
■ For Scale, select 1:100.
■ For Model Graphics Style, select Shading w/Edges.
the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown.

Sketch the area reinforcement
8 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Garage Level -1.
9 Select the concrete slab as shown.
10 On the Options Bar, click , to enter sketch mode.

11 Using the line tool, draw an area reinforcement box as shown.


The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed.
Change the area reinforcement properties
14 Select the area reinforcement.
Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area
reinforcement.

16 In the Element Properties dialog, under Layers, clear Top Major Direction, and click OK.
Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view.
Change bar type

18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Layers, change all Bar Types to 13M, and click OK.
Add annotation

21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag.
23 Select the rebar tag, and on the Options Bar, select Attached End.
24 Using the drag control, move the rebar tag approximately as shown.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 342.
Path Reinforcement in a Slab

In this exercise, you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and openMetric\m_RST_Path_Reinf.rvt.
Sketch the path reinforcement

2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side
of the structure as shown.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement.
4 Select the slab opening.
You are now in sketch mode.

5 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 50 mm for Offset.
6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown.
NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a
closed loop.

The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed.

Change bar type
9 Select the Path Reinforcement.
Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 343

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Layers, for Primary Bar - Type, select 13M, and click OK.

13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown.

15 Double-click the section head to open the section view.
16 On the View Control Bar, do the following:
■ For Model Graphics Style, select Shading w/Edges.
the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown.

Change rebar properties
18 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening.
Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears.
20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown.
Add annotation

22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag.
24 Select the rebar tag, and on the Options Bar, select Free End.
25 Using the drag control, move the rebar tag approximately as shown.
Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 345

27 Proceed to the next exercise, Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 346.
Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing

In this exercise, you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Footing_Detail.rvt.
Open section view

2 On the Toolbar, click , draw a pick box, and zoom in on the southwest corner of the
structure.
3 Click the section line, and position the upper drag bar as shown.

4 Press ESC.
The Section 1 view opens.
Add wall keys at the bottom of wall
6 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown.
Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 347

NOTE For training purposes, Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control
Bar).
7 On the Toolbar, click (Edit Cut Profile).

8 On the Options Bar, select Boundary between faces.
9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing.
10 On the Design Bar, click (Draw), select Chain, and click (Line). Sketch 3 lines as shown.

Sketch rebar parallel to the footing
14 Select the continuous footing as the host element.
The Design Bar changes to sketch mode.
15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right
as shown.
16 Press ESC.
17 On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch.
Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall
20 Select the continuous footing as the host element.
21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as
shown.

NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall.
22 Press ESC.
NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. This rebar will not
be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall.
23 On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch.
Add hook
24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps, and click Element Properties.
25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Construction, for Hook At Start, select Standard - 90
deg.
26 Click OK.

Mirror the rebar
27 On the Options Bar, click (Mirror), and select the center reference plane of the structural
wall.
Place rebar perpendicular
31 Select the end of the straight bar, and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars
approximately as shown.

Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar.
32 Click to place the first rebar as shown.

Place rebar set

35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement.
36 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For Layout, select Minimum Clear Spacing.
37 Select the rebar set.

38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown.

Set rebar cover by element
40 On the Toolbar, click (Edit Rebar Cover).

Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines.
41 On the Options Bar, click (Pick Elements).

42 Select the footing.

43 On the Options Bar, click (Edit Cover Settings).
44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog, do the following:
■ Click Add.
■ For Description, enter Exposed/Cast against Earth.
■ For Setting, enter 51 mm.
■ Click OK.
Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting.
Set rebar cover by face
46 On the Options Bar, (Pick Faces).

47 Select the face of the structural wall.

49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog, do the following:
■ Under Description, select Exposed/Cast against Earth.
■ Click OK.
Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting.
50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall.
Check rebar clear spacing
51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.

52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown.

The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted.
53 Click to select this plane, and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown.
54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension.
NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar
array. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met.

56 Proceed to the next exercise, Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 357.
Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall

In this exercise, you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Wall_Detail.rvt.
Create section view

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Garage Level - 1.
2 On the Toolbar, click , draw a pick box, and zoom in on the southwest corner of the
structure.
4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C, move the cursor down, and click the outside
wall to place the section as shown.
Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 357

6 Click the section line, and position the drag bar as shown.
7 Press ESC.
The Section 2 view opens.
the foundation wall is shown.

NOTE For training purposes, the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view.
Place horizontal rebar
12 In the Type Selector, select Rebar Bar : 22M.
13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown.

Place rebar set

16 Press the SPACEBAR, until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement, as shown.

Resize the rebar set
18 On the Toolbar, click , draw a zoom box, and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure.
19 Select the rebar set, and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level - 1.

The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level.
Mirror the rebar set
21 Select the rebar set.
22 On the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).

23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown.

Place vertical rebar
25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area, and click Zoom to Fit.
26 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall.
29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host.
30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point.
Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover.

31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level - 1.

33 Press ESC.
Mirror the rebar
35 Click the vertical rebar.
36 On the Edit toolbar, click .

37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears.

39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.

40 Press CTRL, and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown.

43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog, for 3D View, select View unobscured and
View as solid, and click OK.

46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is
visible.

47 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp.
Notice the rebar is visible.
Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall
48 Select the single rebar, and on the Options Bar, do the following:
The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall.

close the exercise file without saving changes.
50 Proceed to the next tutorial, Annotating and Dimensioning on page 369.

368
Annotating and
Dimensioning 11
In this tutorial, you learn how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 projects.
Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. In
Revit Structure, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display
automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. Permanent dimensions
must be explicitly created.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can
add to your drawings. The dimension types include aligned, linear, multi-segmented, radial, angular, baseline,
and ordinate.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Dimensioning.rvt.
Create permanent dimensions
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Floor.
The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned
and snap to wall centerlines.
3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar, move the cursor over the north wall of the
proposed North Building.
4 When the centerline of the wall highlights, select it.
369
5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights, select
it.
6 Move the cursor to the left, toward the empty space outside the wall, and click to place the
dimension.
The dimension displays in the drawing. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it,
indicating that the dimension can be modified.
7 Click the lock.

The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the
referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension.
370 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning

9 Select the north wall and move it upward.
Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall, and the distance between them does not
change because the dimension is constrained.
10 On the Toolbar, click (Undo).

11 Select the dimension, click the lock to unlock it, and press DELETE.
Create a multi-segmented dimension

13 On the Options Bar, select Wall centerlines for Prefer.
14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building.
15 On the Options Bar, select Wall faces for Prefer.
16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building.
17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building, and click to set the dimension location.
An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. In addition, an equal symbol
with a slash through it is displayed, indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in
length.
Create a radial dimension
19 On the Options Bar, click (Create Radial Dimensions), and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.
20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building:
■ Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension.
■ Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall, and click to place the dimension.
Creating Dimensions | 371

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom box around the curved wall.
The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline, the default dimension option.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the dimension line of the radial dimension, and press
DELETE.
24 On the Options Bar, click , and select Wall faces for Prefer.
25 Dimension the curved wall again:
■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights.
■ Select the inside face of the wall, and place the dimension as shown.
26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North
Building.
Create an angular dimension
27 On the Options Bar, click (Create Angular Dimensions), and verify that Wall faces is selected
for Prefer.
28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building:
■ Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening, and then select the inside face
of the vertical wall below it.
■ Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc, as shown, and click to place the
dimension.

Create a linear dimension
29 On the Options Bar, click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions).

Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. The linear
dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. The
dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis, and depends on the
cursor tracking behavior. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR.
30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building:

■ In the top room on the left side of the building, select a point at the interior corner of the
top left wall join.
■ Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room.
■ Move your cursor to the right, and click to place the dimension.

Create a baseline dimension
32 On the Toolbar, click , and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall
of the south building as shown.

34 On the Options Bar, click . .
36 In the Type Properties dialog, do the following:
■ Under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline.
■ Click Apply, and OK.

38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown.
39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown.
Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1).
40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown.

Create an ordinate dimension
42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps.
43 On the Options Bar, click . .

■ Under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate.

Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid
1), to each additional element (grids 2 through 5).
Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension
47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2.

48 In the Dimension Text dialog, do the following:
■ Under Dimension value, click Replace with Text, and enter S.A.D.
■ Click Apply and OK.
Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S.A.M. (See Architectural Drawing).
49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step.

50 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Text Fields, do the following:
■ For Below, enter V.I.F. +/150
■ Click Apply and OK.

Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text.

file name: m_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.rvt.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Line Location on page 376.
Controlling Witness Line Location

In this exercise, you learn to add, delete, and change the origin of dimension witness lines. When you place
dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override
their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate
the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, whereas the witness lines referring to interior
walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.rvt
Override dimension defaults

1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building
model in the previous exercise.
3 On the Options Bar, verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer.
4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building, but do not select anything.
5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face.
Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them, because the
Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option.
6 Position the cursor over the wall, and press TAB repeatedly.
Each time you press TAB, a different wall selection choice highlights, including the wall centerline.
7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights, select it.
8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building, press TAB until the wall centerline
highlights, and select it.
9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building, and select the exterior face.
10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building, and select the exterior face.
11 Place the dimension as shown.

Edit dimension witness lines

13 Select the dimension that you just placed.
The dimension highlights, and control boxes display on each witness line.
Controlling Witness Line Location | 377

14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North
Building.
The witness line moves to interior wall face.
15 Click the control box again.

The witness line moves to the wall centerline.
16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the
South Building, but do not select it.
17 Right-click the control box, and click Delete Witness Line.
The witness line is deleted.
18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building,
and click Edit Witness Lines.
IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. If
you right-click the control box, a context menu with different options is displayed.
19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building.
The full dimension string is displayed.

20 To end the editing command, click in the drawing area away from the floor plan.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Dimension Properties on page 379.
Modifying Dimension Properties

In this exercise, you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.rvt.
Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the multi-segmented dimension
that you modified in the previous exercise.

4 In the Type Properties dialog, change the following type parameter values:
■ Under Text, enter 5 mm for the Text Size.
■ Under Text, select Right, then Up for Read Convention.
This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on, not the direction it is read.
5 Click OK twice.
The dimension updates as shown.
Modifying Dimension Properties | 379

You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise, a new training file is provided.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 380.
Working with Alignments and Constraints

In this exercise, you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your
drawings. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. A locked
alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. As
you create components, alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. For example, when
sketching walls, if 2 or more walls are colinear, a lock symbol immediately displays, allowing you to lock
the alignment of the walls.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Alignment.rvt.
Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan
1 On the Toolbar, click (Align).

The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip, indicating that the Align command is active.
2 Align the walls:

■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall.
■ Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left.
The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. When
you align 2 components, the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in

position, while the second component moves to complete the alignment. The lock symbol
displays as unlocked, indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other.
3 Click the lock.

The symbol changes to a closed lock, indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked.
Align the 3 short horizontal walls
4 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment, and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.
5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will
align.
6 Select the short wall to the left.

7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls.
8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right.
Do not lock this segment of the alignment.
Working with Alignments and Constraints | 381

10 Select the middle horizontal wall, and drag it downward.
The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it, but the wall on the right
does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked).
11 On the Toolbar, click (Undo) once to undo the move.

12 Click the right wall, and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.
Move the walls to verify the alignment.

Align the windows on the floor plan
13 On the Toolbar, click (Align).

14 On the Options Bar, clear Multiple Alignment.
15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan.
16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall.

The 2 windows align.
17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall.

18 Select the far right window in the top wall.
The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension.
19 To view the constraint, on the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension between the
second window and the right wall. A lock is displayed, indicating the constraint.
20 Click the lock to unlock it.
21 On the Toolbar, click , and align the windows.
Working with Alignments and Constraints | 383

22 Align the remaining windows, as shown.
file name: m_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt.
24 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 384.
Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions

In this exercise, you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting
the wall, instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt.
1 View the south wall, and notice that it includes 5 openings.
You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension
string.

■ On the Options Bar, click (Create Aligned Dimensions).
■ For Prefer, verify that Wall centerlines is selected.
■ For Pick, select Entire Walls.
■ Click Options.
4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog, select Openings and Widths.

These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case, the windows),
and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.
5 Click OK.
6 Select the south wall.
The 2 vertical walls highlight, indicating the start and end of the dimension string.
7 Move your cursor below the south wall, and click to add the dimension.
Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions | 385

10 Proceed to the next exercise, Working with Spot Dimensions on page 386.
Working with Spot Dimensions

In this exercise, you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof.rvt.
Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof

1 In the Project Browser, expand Structural Plans, and double-click New Roof.
2 On the Options Bar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown.
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.
4 In the Type Selector, select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative).
5 On the Options Bar, select Leader, and for Relative Base, select Current Level.
6 Place the spot dimension as follows:
■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof.
Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved.
■ Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown.

■ Move the cursor up and to the left.
■ Click to create the second leader point.
■ Move the cursor to the left.
■ Click to place the spot dimension.
7 On the Options Bar, click , and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown.
10 On the Options Bar, select Leader, and for Relative Base, select Current Level.
11 Place the spot dimension as follows:
■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown.
Working with Spot Dimensions | 387

■ Move the cursor up and to the right.
■ Move the cursor to the right.
■ Click to place the spot dimension.
■ Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension.
Add a spot dimension to the footing
12 In the Project Browser, expand Structural Plans, and double-click Foundation.
13 On the Options Bar, click , and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown.

16 On the Options Bar, select Leader, and Current Level for Relative Base.
17 Place the spot elevation as follows:
■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing.
■ Click to create the third leader point.

Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed.
Change the spot dimension properties
18 Select the spot dimension.

■ Under Text, for Single/Upper Value Prefix, enter TOF=.

■ Click OK.
Change the text orientation
22 Select the spot dimension.

25 In the Type Properties dialog, under Text, do the following:
■ Select Bold.
■ For Text Location, select In-line with Leader.


Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam
28 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation.
29 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, select Medium.
30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate.
31 Place the spot coordinate as follows:
■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam.
Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves.
■ Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown.
■ Click to place the spot coordinate.
Change the spot coordinate orientation
32 Select the spot coordinate.

35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Text, do the following:
■ Select Bold.

■ For Text Location, select In-line with Leader.
■ For Elevation Indicator, enter EL.

Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates.

You can save the open file if you wish. In the next lesson, a new training file is provided.
39 Proceed to the next lesson, Annotating on page 392.
Annotating
In this lesson, you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. You learn
how to:
■ Tag beams in a plan view
■ Tag a beam system
■ Tag beams by category
■ Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag
■ Create a custom beam tag.
Tagging Beams
In this exercise, you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view, and add an
end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. You also learn how to create a custom mark in
place of an existing beam tag.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Annotations.rvt.

Tag all beams in plan view
1 In the Project Browser, expand Structural Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Beam Annotations.
The Beam Annotations dialog opens.
3 In the Beam Annotations dialog, do the following:

■ Under Placement, select All beams in current plan view.
■ Click OK.
Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan
view.
Add an end-reaction value to specific beams
4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown.
Tagging Beams | 393

NOTE For training purposes, the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed
from this view.
5 On the Design Bar, click Beam Annotations.

6 In the Beam Annotations dialog, do the following:
■ Under Placement, select All selected beams in current plan view, and click Remove existing
beam tags and spot elevations.
■ Click Settings.
■ In the Placement Settings dialog, for Horizontal End Offset, enter 60 mm, and click OK.
This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location
as indicated in the dialog.
■ Under Annotation location and type, click the Level beams in plan tab.
■ Click , to specify the top-end annotation type as shown.
■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog, under Select Element to Place, click Structural Framing
Tag.
■ Under Structural Framing Tag, select M_Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard,
and click OK.

■ In the Beam Annotations dialog, click OK.
Enter the reaction force

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analysis Results, enter 44.5 kN for End Reaction - Live,
and click OK.
The end reaction value is added to the selected beams.

Create a custom type mark tag

11 Right-click the open area above the model, and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.
12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown.
Tagging Beams | 395

13 Click one of the 356x171x51UB beams, and on the Options Bar, click .
15 In the Type Properties dialog, under Type Mark, enter 356, click Apply, and then OK.
17 Click one of the 254x102x28UB beams, and on the Options Bar, click .
19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Type Mark, enter 254, click Apply, and then OK.

Edit the beam tag family
21 Click one of the 356x171x51UB beam tags, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing, click Yes. You are now in the
Family Editor.
22 Click the structural label, and on the Options bar, click .

23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Label, for Value, click Edit.

24 In the Edit Label dialog, under Category Parameters, select Type Mark, click (Add
parameter(s) to a label), and click OK.

■ Select a folder location.
■ Enter Structural Framing Tag - by Type Mark for File name.
■ Click Save.
28 On the Family Design Bar, click Load into Projects.

29 In the Load into Projects dialog, select the active file, and click OK.
Apply the new type mark tag to all beams
30 In the plan view, click the 356x171x51UB beam tag, and, while pressing CTRL, select the
254x102x28UB beam tag.
31 In the Type Selector, select Structural Framing Tag - by Type Mark: Standard.
The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams.
Tagging Beams | 397

32 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown.
33 On the Options bar, click (Filter).

■ Click Check None to clear all items.
■ Select Structural Framing Tags.

■ Click OK.
35 In the Type Selector, select Structural Framing Tag - by Type Mark: Standard.
The new beam tag is applied to all beams.
36 To save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name,
or close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Tag the beam system
37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom box around the beam system
as shown.
NOTE For training purposes, the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps.
Tagging Beams | 399

38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Beam System Tag.
Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area, and notice the tag for the specific beam
system displays.
39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag.
40 Click File ➤ Close.

You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise a new training file is provided.
41 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 400.
Creating a Custom Beam Tag

In this exercise, you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply
the tag to different beam types.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Custom_beam_tag.rvt.
Open the beam tag family

2 Click one of the 254x102x28UB beam tags, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing, click Yes. You are now in the
Family Editor.
3 Click the structural label, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Label.
Add multiple categories to the beam label
4 In the Edit Label dialog, add the following categories:
■ Under Category Parameters, select Number of studs, and click (Add parameter).
The new category is added to the label as parameter 2.

■ Under Category Parameters, select Camber Size, and click .
The new category is added to the label as parameter 3.
5 In the Edit Label dialog, add the following Label Parameters:

■ Select parameter 1, for Sample Value, enter 254x102x28UB, and select Break.
■ Select parameter 2, for Prefix, enter [ (open bracket), for Sample Value, enter S1, and for
Suffix, enter ] (close bracket).
■ Select parameter 3, for Spaces, select 3, for Prefix, enter ( (left parenthesis), for Sample Value,
enter C=50mm, and for Suffix, enter ) (right parenthesis).
6 In the Edit Label dialog, click OK.

Align the beam tag
7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Vertical Align, select Top, and click OK.
10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides).
11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, do the following:
■ Click the Annotation Categories tab.
■ Under Visibility, select Reference Planes.
■ Click OK.
12 Select the text on the beam label.

13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just
below the horizontal reference plane as shown.
Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 401

14 Click Modify.
15 On the Design Bar, click Load into Project.
In the Reload Family dialog, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type.
View the framing schedule
16 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Structural Framing

Schedule.
Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter, and the camber
size for each beam type in the structure.
View the properties for beam type S2

18 Click one of the 356x171x51UB beams.

■ Under Structural, notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the
framing schedule.

■ Click OK.
21 Click File ➤ Save As, and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference.
22 Proceed to the next tutorial, Worksets on page 405.
Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 403

404
Worksets
12
On many building projects, engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task.
This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. In Autodesk Revit Structure 2009,
this collection of building elements (such as roofs, slabs, beams, etc.) is called a workset. In this tutorial, you learn how
to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project, to allow visibility control
and ownership for each assigned element, and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure.
You can enable Worksharing for any project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. All other team members
can view this workset; however, they cannot make changes to it. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If
you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on, you can borrow that
element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset.
Using Worksharing, team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the
network to their own hard drive, and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. They can also update
their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.
Using Worksharing in a Project

In this lesson, you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use
of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You begin by enabling
Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. In the next exercise, you learn
how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You then learn how to work within a
Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users.
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets

In this exercise, you enable Worksharing within an existing project. You subdivide the project into worksets
and save the project as the central file.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Worksets.rvt.
Enable Worksharing
1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.

2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.
405
The Worksets dialog is displayed.
Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you, and User1 is displayed as the present
owner.
TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. For training
purposes, the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu).
You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.
3 In the Worksets dialog, under Show, select:

■ Families
■ Project Standards
■ Views
4 Scroll down the list of workset names, and notice all are editable by you.
5 Under Show, clear Families, Project Standards, and Views.
Only User-Created worksets should display.
In this simple training project, a small number of team members are working on the structural
model. For training purposes, imagine 5 users including yourself. The project is subdivided in
such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. In this case, one team member is assigned to the
slabs, a second user is assigned the roof, a third is assigned all beams and columns, a fourth is
assigned the foundation and garage ramp, a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts, and all team
members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files.
Therefore, you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently.
Creating new worksets
6 In the Worksets dialog, click New.

7 In the New Workset dialog, do the following:
■ For new workset name, enter Beams and Columns.
■ Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected.
■ Click OK.
406 | Chapter 12 Worksets

■ For new workset name, enter Elevator Shafts.
■ Click OK.

■ For new workset name, enter Foundation.
■ Clear Visible by default in all views.

The foundation should only be visible in specific views. This improves performance because
fewer components need to be generated in each view.
■ Click OK.

■ For new workset name, enter Slabs.
■ Click OK.
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 407

■ For new workset name, enter Roof.

The roof should only be visible in specific views. Again, this improves performance.
■ Click OK.

■ For new workset name, enter Garage Ramp.

The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. Again, this improves performance.
■ Click OK.

■ For new workset name, enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files.
■ Click OK.

You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. The
next step is to create the central file.
20 In the Worksets dialog, click OK

Create the central file

The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.
Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to, but be sure not
to save the file in the training files location. This is imperative if you and another user intend
to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. If you do not have access to a network
and still want to complete that exercise, this can be accomplished by saving the central file to
your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.
22 In the Save As dialog, for file name, enter Worksets Project - Central.
23 Click Save.
Now that you have created the central file, you must relinquish workset editability so that other
users can have access to the worksets they need.
NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps.
Check in the worksets

25 In the Worksets dialog, under Show, select:
■ User-Created
■ Families
■ Project Standards
■ Views
26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A.

27 On the right side of the dialog, click Non Editable.
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 409

In the Worksets dialog, notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets
and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing.
28 In the Worksets dialog, click OK.

29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.
30 In the Save to Central dialog, under Comments, enter Initial Central File Setup, and click OK.
31 After the file is saved, click File menu ➤ Close.

Create a local file

Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project - Central on the network drive.
33 Select the file, and click Open.

35 In the Save As dialog, navigate to a folder on your local computer.
36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name, and click Save.
37 Proceed to the next exercise, Assigning Worksets on page 411.

In this exercise, you enabled Worksharing on a project, and created new worksets to accommodate each
team member. You then created the central file, checked in all worksets, and created a local file. This project
is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets.
Assigning Worksets
In this exercise, you assign the structural columns workset to User1.
NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise.

In the Worksets dialog, notice that all worksets are available for editing.
2 Click Cancel.
3 Click one of the structural columns as shown.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, for Workset, select Beams and Columns.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it.
Assigning Worksets | 411

The Worksets dialog, under Borrowers for Workset1, notice that User1 is listed.
9 Click Cancel.
Assign the structural columns
10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.

12 In the Filter dialog, click Check None.
13 Select Structural Columns, and click OK.

All structural columns in the model are highlighted, and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays
next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable.
14 Right-click one of the columns, and click Make Elements Editable.

The puzzle-piece icons disappear, but the columns remain highlighted.

16 In the Element Properties dialog, for Workset, select Beams and Columns.
Assigning Worksets | 413

17 Click OK.
The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1.

19 In the Save to Central dialog, under After save relinguish editable, clear Borrowed Elements, and
click OK.
20 Click File menu ➤ Save, to save the local file.

21 Proceed to the next exercise, Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 414.
Making the Entire Workset Editable

In this exercise, you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users.

Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive.
2 Click Open.

In the Worksets dialog, notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns.
4 In the Worksets dialog, select Workset1, and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog.
User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1.
5 Click OK.
Assign the floor workset
6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.

8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and select Floors.
Making the Entire Workset Editable | 415

9 Click OK.
All floors are highlighted.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, for Workset, select Slabs.
12 Click OK.
The slabs are now assigned for Workset1.

Assign the roof workset
13 Select the roof as shown.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, for Workset, select Roof.
16 Click OK.
The roof is now assigned for Workset1.
Using the steps described in the previous procedure, assign the remaining worksets for the
elevator shafts, foundation, and the garage ramp.
Turn visibility on/off
17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof.

18 Enter VV. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override.
19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, click the Worksets tab.
Making the Entire Workset Editable | 417

20 Clear Beams and Columns, Roof, and Slabs, and then click Apply and OK.
21 The elements are now hidden from the view. To turn off additional elements, clear the box next
to the desired element.
22 Enter VV, and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, click the Worksets tab.
23 Check Beams and Columns, Roof, and Slabs, and then click Apply and OK.
The elements are now visible in the view.
Save to central file

25 In the Save to Central dialog, select:
■ User-created Worksets
■ Borrowed Elements
26 After the file is saved, click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy.
27 Under Comment, enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets.
28 Click OK.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 419.
Using Worksets with Multiple Users

In this exercise, two users access the central file through a network connection. For training purposes, they
are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes
it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Throughout the process, each user must
check out worksets, make elements editable, and reload the latest changes.
This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and
central files. If you have not yet completed these exercises, please do so before continuing.
Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file,
a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting
the user name to User 2. In the following section of this exercise, instructions are provided on how to
accomplish this.
NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2), skip the following section, and proceed to Create a local
copy.
Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2

1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window.
2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop
or by selecting it from the Start menu.
3 On the Settings menu, click Options.
4 Click the General Tab and, under User name, enter User 2, and click OK.
WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file, return to the Settings dialog,
and reset the User name to your computer login name. This is a system setting.
Create a local copy
5 In this exercise, two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created
and saved in a previous exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises
and created central files on the network, select one of those central files to be used in this
exercise.
Regardless of which central file you choose to use, one user has already created a local file. For
training purposes, consider that person to be User 1. The user who has not yet created a local
file for the chosen central file is User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2.
Throughout the remainder of this exercise, instructions are staggered, specifically sequenced,
and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.
User 2: Create a local file, and check out worksets
6 Click File menu ➤ Open, and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named
Worksets project-Central.rvt.
Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 419

7 In the Open dialog, select the central file and, under Open Worksets, select Specify.
8 Click Open.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets
you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced
workset is opened but hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large
project files and increases performance while you work.
9 In the Opening Worksets dialog, select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
11 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
12 In the File Save Options dialog, verify that Make this the Central location after save is not
selected, and click OK.
13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive, name the file Worksets Project_Local-User
2, and click Save.
You now have a local copy of the project. This file is for your use only.

15 Select the Foundation workset, and select Yes for Editable.
You are now the owner of that workset.
16 Click OK.
User 1: Check out worksets, modify the structural model, and publish changes
17 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open, open it now.
Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2.
19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes.

A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is
already checked out by another user.
20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog.

21 Select the Beams and Columns workset, and select Yes for Editable.
Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. If you
only have one workset checked out, it becomes the active workset.
22 Click OK.
23 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D-Atrium.
24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration, and move it.

A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists.
25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning.

27 In the Save to Central dialog, select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved.
28 Click OK.
User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes

Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.
That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets
are explicitly updated.
30 Using the following illustration as a guide, select a footing, and move it.
Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 421

User 1: Reload latest worksets, and check out additional worksets
32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest.

The changes User 2 made are apparent.

34 Select Roof, select Yes for Editable, and click OK.
Because you now have more than one workset checked out, you are asked if you want to make
the Roof workset the active workset. Click Yes.
Even though the Roof workset is active, you still have complete access to the elements belonging
to the Beams and Columns worksets. However, any elements added to the structure are
automatically assigned to the active workset.
35 On the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof.

37 In the Design Bar, click Pick Supports, and sketch a new roof between any four beams.
A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in
that view. This is because when the Roof workset was created, the Visible by default option was
not selected. Therefore, the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked
out and is the active workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof.

40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Worksets tab, select Roof to turn on its visibility, and
click OK.
41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays.

43 In the Save to Central dialog, select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved.
44 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element
Borrowing exercise, leave this file open in its current state.
In this exercise, two users worked on the same structure using worksets. Each user checked out worksets,
modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file.
In the final exercise of this tutorial, you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are
actively working on.
If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial, Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other
Users on page 423, leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can
skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section, Check out worksets.
Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users

In this exercise, two users are working on the same project with separate local files. As each of you work,
you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. You learn how to
make borrowing requests and how to grant them.
This exercise requires two users and, throughout this training, they are referred to as User 1 and User 2.
There are specific instructions for each user. Each user must have network access to the central file.
Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file,
a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting
the user name to User 2. At the appropriate point in this exercise, instructions are provided on how to
accomplish this.
If you have not completed the previous workset exercises, you need to set up your central and local files.
Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location.
NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial, you may receive a message informing you that the central
file has been relocated. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. These messages are a result of the
central file being relocated (to your PC). In subsequent steps, you save the training file as a central file, and these
problems are rectified.
User 1: Check out worksets

2 In the Worksets dialog, if any User-Created worksets are not open, select them, and click Open.
Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 423

3 Select the Foundation workset, and select Yes for Editable.
4 Under Active Workset, select Foundation, and click OK.

User 2: Check out worksets

6 In the Worksets dialog, select the Beams and Columns workset, and select Yes for Editable.
7 Under Active Workset, select Beams and Columns, and click OK.
User 2: Borrow an element from User 1

9 On the Options Bar, verify that Editable Only is cleared.
This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own.
10 Using the following illustration as a guide, select a footing.
A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.
11 Move the footing.

A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.
12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing.
After you submit the request, a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from
User 1.
At this point, you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed
element. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.
User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element
13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your
authorization, click File menu ➤ Editing Requests.

14 In the Editing Requests dialog, select the request submitted by User 2.
15 Click Grant.
16 Click Close.
User 2: Check for editability grant
17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog, click Check Now.

A message informs you that your request has been granted.
18 Click OK, and notice the footing is in the new location.

User 1 and 2: Save to Central, to Local, and close

20 In the Save to Central dialog, select the following, and click OK.
■ User-created Worksets
■ Borrowed Elements (User 2 only)
■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully

22 Proceed to the next tutorial, Project Coordination on page 427.
In this multi-user exercise, you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that
workset was actively being edited by another user. In this case, you requested permission to edit the element,
and the other user granted it.
Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 425

426
Project Coordination
13
You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. In this tutorial, the
structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model, reviews each change individually, and determines the
impact of each modification on the structure. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated
when the project was started. Once each change has been reviewed, an interference check is run on the model to correct
the placement of any architectural elements (door, or window) that might interfere with elements in the Autodesk Revit
Structure 2009 model. Finally, all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature.
Coordination Review
In this lesson, you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture
file. In the tutorial, Starting a New Project on page 115, the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure,
and the copy monitor feature was activated. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids,
levels, floors, walls, and columns for any future modifications. When the modified file is brought back into
Revit Structure, the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes, which can be accepted,
rejected, or postponed, depending on the impact to the design. Finally, you run an interference check to
verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model.
Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file

Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Coordination.rvt
NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor
feature of Revit Structure, a warning is displayed. Click OK to open the file.
427
3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, select the Revit Links tab.
4 Select the linked file m_RBD_After.rvt, click Apply, and then click OK.
The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. Click
, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B, and
notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway.
5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Coordination for Discipline, and click
OK.
Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible.
7 Enter ZF.
This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.

9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown.
428 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination

10 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft
as shown.

The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. Close all additional
views that may have been opened accidentally.
12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window:
■ Select , and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft.
■ On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and click Wireframe.
■ Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. Click to select the
linked file.
The Revit Architecture file is highlighted, and the Coordination Review icon displays on the
Options Bar.
Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 429

The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. These messages
identify elements that were deleted, moved, or changed in some way from the architect’s file.
The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action
to resolve the conflict. Actions include: Postpone, Reject, Accept Difference, and a custom
message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category.
14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view.

Review change to Floor Sketch
15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible.

16 In the Coordination Review dialog, do the following:
■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches.
■ Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different.
■ Click the message Floor: Floor: 152mm Concrete, and click Show.
The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window.
■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches, press SHIFT, select the remaining
messages, and then click Show.
Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view.
■ In the Action column, select Copy Sketch to Floor: 152mm Concrete, and click Apply.

The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate
the architect’s floor sketch change.
Review location of grid B
17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible.

Review location of elevator walls
19 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view.

■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls, expand Maintain wall position.
There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. Select one of the messages and notice
the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view.
■ Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different, press SHIFT, and select the
remaining messages.
■ For Action, select Modify Wall 'Basic Wall: Generic 203mm Masonry', and click Apply.

The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s
change.
Review wall modifications
21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible.
■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing.
■ Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation - 305mm Concrete.
■ Select Postpone for Action.

The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding.
■ Click the Add Comment field.
■ In the Edit Comment dialog, enter Need to discuss with architect.
■ Click OK.
■ Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic 203mm Masonry.
■ Select Postpone for Action.
■ Click the Add Comment field.
■ In the Edit Comment dialog, enter Need to discuss with architect.

■ Click OK.
■ In the Coordination Review dialog, click Apply, and OK.
file name: m_RST_Coordination-in progress.rvt.
24 Proceed to the next exercise, Interference Check on page 434.
Interference Check
In this exercise, you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the
stairway. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column, and the
second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway.
end of that exercise, m_RST_Coordination-in progress.rvt
1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check.

The default table compares elements within the same project. The next step is to select the
architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project.
2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog, select m_RBD_After.rvt for Categories from.

Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project.
Run interference check on columns and stairs
3 In the list for the current project, select Structural Columns, and Stairs for the Revit Architecture
project.
Interference Check | 435

4 Click OK.
A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural
project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project.
5 In the Interference Report dialog, do the following:

■ Under Structural Columns, expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown.

There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway.
Each representing a different level.
■ Select m_RBD_After.rvt: Stairs: 178mm max riser 28mm tread.

Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3
window
■ Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W254X838mm.

Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3
window, and that it interferes with the stairway.
■ Click Export to generate an interference report.
Export the Column interference report
6 In the Export dialog:

■ Under Save in, select a folder location on your local computer.
■ Under File name, enter Columns vs. Stair Check.
■ Under Save as type, select Revit Interference Report (*.html).
■ Click Save.
The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with
the architect.
7 In the Interference Report dialog, click Close.

Run interference check on vertical bracing
8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check.

9 In the Interference Check dialog, select m_RBD_After.rvt for Categories from.
10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project, and Doors for the Revit
Architecture project.
11 Click OK.
There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left
stairway.

12 In the Interference Report dialog, do the following:
■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors.
■ Select m_RBD_After.rvt: Doors: Door Single 914mm x 2134mm.

Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural
Plan view windows.
■ Select Structural Framing: L-Angle L100X100X19
.
Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural
Plan view windows, also the brace interferes with the opening.
■ Click Export to generate an interference report.
Export the Brace and Door interference report
13 In the Export dialog:

■ Under Save in, select a folder location on your local computer.
■ Under File name, enter Brace vs. Door opening.
■ Under Save as type, select Revit Interference Report (*.html).

■ Click Save.
14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. In the next lesson, a new
training file is provided.
15 In the Interference Report dialog, click Close.
The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with
the architect.
16 Proceed to the next lesson, Using Revision Tracking on page 440.
Using Revision Tracking

Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can create a sequence
of revisions, and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can
use revision tags to notate the revision clouds, and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear
in the title block of each project sheet.
Setting Up a Revision Table

Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Revision.rvt.
Specify a revision numbering method

1 On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
2 In the Revisions dialog, verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method.
When you use this option, the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they
are added to a sheet. If you select By Project, the revisions are numbered according to the
sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. For example, if the active revision is number 1,
all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.
Add a revision for grid B
3 Click on the value for Release Date, and enter 2/15/06.

This is the date the revisions were identified.
4 Click on the value for Description, and enter Moved Grid B west by 609mm.
In general, revision descriptions should be comprehensive, yet as concise as possible.
5 Verify that Issued is cleared.

When Issued is selected, the revision is locked and issued to the field.
6 Verify that Visible is selected.

If Visible is not selected, any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not
visible in the view in which you create it. In most instances, you would turn off visibility only
after a revision was issued.
7 Click Apply, and OK.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Sketching Revision Clouds on page 441.
Sketching Revision Clouds

In this exercise, you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. Revision
clouds have read-only properties, including revision number and revision date, which are inherited from
the revision table you created for the project.
You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. However, you can add a revision cloud
to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.
You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.
Add a revision cloud for grid B

1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click S.1 - Level 3 Framing Plan.
2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Revision Cloud.
Revit Structure is now in sketch mode.
3 Right-click the view on the sheet, and select Activate View.

The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet, allowing you to edit the model
directly from the sheet.
4 In the drawing area, click near grid line B, and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment
of the revision cloud.
5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.
6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.
Sketching Revision Clouds | 441

The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line.
NOTE At this point, the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes
to the revision cloud. In this tutorial, the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision
clouds have been drawn.
file name: m_RST_Revision-in progress.rvt.
9 Proceed to the next exercise, Add Remaining Revisions on page 442.
Add Remaining Revisions

In this exercise, the remaining revisions for the project are documented.
end of that exercise, m_RST_Revision-in progress.rvt.
Add a revision for the elevator stairs

1 On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
2 In the Revisions dialog, click Add: New.
A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table.

This is the date the revisions were sent out for review.
4 Click on the value for Description, and enter Moved Stair exit 609mm west.


Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs

8 In the drawing area, click above the elevator shaft, and move the cursor clockwise to create a
segment of the revision cloud.

The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. You can change the appearance of
the cloud from the Settings menu.
Add a revision for the brace interference


14 Click on the value for Description, and enter Research brace.
Add Remaining Revisions | 443


Add a revision cloud for the brace interference
17 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click S.2 - Stair Shafts Sections.
18 Right-click the center view on the sheet, and select Activate View.

20 In the drawing area, click above the brace, and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment

The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. You can change the appearance of the cloud
from the Settings menu.
Add a revision for the door interference


26 Click on the value for Description, and enter Research door.


Add Remaining Revisions | 445

Add a revision cloud for the door interference
30 Right-click the right view on the sheet, and select Activate View.

32 In the drawing area, click above the door, and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment

The revision cloud is displayed around the door. You can change the appearance of the cloud
from the Settings menu.

37 Proceed to the next exercise, Tagging Revision Clouds on page 446.
Tagging Revision Clouds

In this exercise, you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. The tag number that
is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision
table in a previous exercise.
Place a revision tag

2 Right-click the view on the sheet, and select Activate View.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ Tag By Category.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
5 In the drawing area, position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B.
If the cursor is just inside the cloud, the tag is displayed inside the cloud.
6 Click to place the tag.
The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. The number is based on the numbering
method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by sheet,
and because the revision is the first in the project, the cloud is tagged as number 1.
7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds.
9 Proceed to the next exercise, Working with Revisions on page 447.
Working with Revisions

In this exercise, you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise, and then issue the
revisions to create a record, and lock it from further changes.
View the revisions
2 Select , and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown.
Working with Revisions | 447

4 Select , and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown.
Issue a revision
5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet, you
prevent further changes to the revision. You do this by issuing the revision.
On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
6 Select Issued for each revision entry, and click OK.
NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the
revision in the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.
7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.

8 Proceed to the next tutorial, Structural Analytical Modelling on page 451.
Working with Revisions | 449

450
Structural Analytical
Modelling 14
In this tutorial, you learn some basic concepts of the Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare
the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software.
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process

Revit Structure combines 2 models. The physical model that is used for documentation, quantity take off,
interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by
multiple 3rd party analysis software. The analytical model consists of structural components, component
properties, material properties, geometry, loads and load combinations. As you create objects and the physical
model, the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships
between the structural objects.
When working with the analytical model, Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a
view. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. You can also apply an existing view’s view
properties using the Apply View Template command. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale,
Discipline, Detail level, and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. View Templates help
standardize the look of all views.
Views and View Templates are not linked. All views created with that template are not automatically updated.
To update a view, you can reapply the modified template.
NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only
be applied to geometric views.
Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties, the View Template saves and applies
only common properties. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same
properties to any other geometric view.
For example, if you save a template from a plan view, you can apply that same template to a 3D view. Though
the View Range property applies only to plan views, the template is still applied to the 3D view. Revit
Structure applies only the properties applicable to both.
451
Analytical Checks
In this exercise, you learn how to check member supports, and run an analytical consistency check on the
analytical model shown below. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the
model adjusted accordingly.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks.rvt.
Apply the view template

2 In the Select View Template dialog, select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical
Stick.
The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new
analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown.
The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new
analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown.
452 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling

NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view, applying either the stick or normal analytical
view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed.
Verify analytical settings

2 In the Structural Settings dialog, select the Analytical Model Settings tab.
This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model
Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog,
under the Analytical Model Settings tab.
Check member supports
3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports.

Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation
support (slab, wall, or isolated). A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural
elements that may not be supported properly.
4 In the Warning dialog click , to view each warning.

Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected.
5 Close the Warning dialog.

Review support warnings
6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.
Analytical Checks | 453

7 In the Warning dialog:
■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1.
■ Click Structural Columns: M_Wide-Flange-Column:W250X38.5
■ Click Show.
■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.

The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area.
Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing.
Review circular reference warnings

■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning
■ Click Structural Framing: UB-Universal Beam: 356x171x51UB
■ Click Show.

Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end.
10 In the Warning dialog, click Close.

Correct member supports

Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations.

13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1, E-3, D-2, D-4, H-3, and
H-4.

Correct circular reference

16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown.

Run a consistency check
2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check.
Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. A Warning
dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. This indicates
the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length.
3 In the Warning dialog, click to view each warning.

Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected.
4 Close the Warning dialog.

Review warnings

■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning.
■ Click UC-Universal Column-Column:254x254x73UC

■ Click Show.

The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area.
7 In the Warning dialog, click Close.
8 Select the column that was previously highlighted, and on the Options Bar, click .
In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, notice that Ground Level is selected
as the value for Top Vertical Projection.

Correct zero-length elements
10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit).

11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible
as shown.
12 Press CTRL, and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown.

14 Under Analytical Model, for Top Vertical Projection, select Top of Column.

16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check.
The Warning dialog does not appear. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, Load Cases on page 460.
Load Cases
In the Structural Settings dialog, you edit and add load cases. The following illustration shows the Structural
Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected.

The first table is the Load Cases table. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can
use to generate loads in the model. In this table, you add, edit, or delete load cases.
The second table is the Load Natures table. In this table, you add or delete load natures.
In this exercise, you learn how to add new load cases.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_SAM3.rvt.
Add a Load Case

2 In the Structural Settings dialog, select the Load Cases tab.
3 Click Add.
A new load case is added to the bottom of the table, and the Add button changes to Duplicate.
4 Click in the name cell of the new load case, and rename it to Roof Hung.
NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. Revit Structure provides a default number.
5 Under Category, select Dead Loads.
NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. Select an existing load case
record in the table, then click Duplicate. The selected load case is copied in the table.
Add a load nature

1 Click in the Load Natures table.
2 Click Add.
A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table.
Load Cases | 461

3 Click in the cell of the new load nature, and enter an appropriate name.
NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table.
4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog.

filename: m_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt.
6 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Loads to the Model on page 462.
Adding Loads to the Model

Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for
loads:
■ project coordinate system
■ current work plane
■ host work plane
The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design
Bar. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated:
A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s
current work plane.
A host for a load has its own work plane, and loads can be placed by default, perpendicular to the host’s
work plane. Hosts include slabs and beams.
In this exercise, you will be adding dead loads, live loads, and wind loads to the model, using the project
coordinate system. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saves at the end
of that exercise, m_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt
Change the coordinate system orientation
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click View 1 - Analytical.

3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible.
4 Select , draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it.
5 On the Options Bar, select .

6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection,
and click OK.
7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Loads.
8 On the Options Bar, click (Area Load).
TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct
option.
9 Click the garage sloped slab.
Adding Loads to the Model | 463

The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is
perpendicular to the host (ramp).
11 Select the load, and on the Options Bar, click .

12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Structural Analysis, select Project for Orient to.
13 Click OK.
The load coordinates are now parallel to the project.
Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Structural Plans, and double-click Level
2-Analytical.
3 On the Options Bar, click (Area Load).

TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct
option.
4 In the Type Selector, select Area Load: Area Load 1.

5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify to exit the Loads tool.
7 Right-click on the load you placed, and click Element Properties.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, enter -0.1330 kN for the Fz 1 parameter, and click OK.
Add wind load at Level 2
9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2-Analytical.


11 On the Options Bar, click (Line Load).
TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option.
12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other, as shown.

14 Right-click on the Line Load 1, and click Element Properties.
TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are
highlighting Line Load 1.

16 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, enter Wind Load, and click OK.
■ Enter 0 kN/m for Fz 1
■ Enter 0.18 kN/m for Fx 1

■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case, and click OK.
18 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click View 1 - Analytical
in order to view the added loads.
20 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2 - Analytical.
21 Select , draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown.

22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Grid.
23 Draw a temporary grid as shown.

This grid is drawn for reference only, and will be deleted in a later step.
24 On the View tab of the Design bar, click Framing Elevation.

25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as
shown.

27 Select the temporary grid, and press DELETE.
28 Double-click the new elevation bubble.
The elevation view opens.
29 Select , draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, click (Line Load).
TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option.
32 On Level 2, select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load.
33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other, as shown.
You will see the load is oriented to project orientation.
34 Select the load, and on the Options Bar, click .

35 In the Element Properties dialog, under Structural Analysis, select Workplane for Orient to, and
click OK.
The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to
which the framing elevation was pointing.

filename: m_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt.
37 Proceed to the next exercise, Load Combination on page 471.
Load Combination
In this exercise, you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software.
You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog.
Add a DL + LL combination
1 On the Settings menu, click Structural Settings.
2 In the Structural Settings dialog, click the Load Combinations tab.
3 Click Add in the Load Combination section.
4 Under Name, enter DL+LL.
5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table, and click Add.
6 Under Factor, enter 1.4.
Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new
factor.
7 Under Case or Combination, select DL1.

8 Click Add.
10 Under Case or Combination, select LL1.
Load Combination | 471

Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor
11 Click on the Load Combination table, and click Add.

12 Under Name, enter DL+LL+WIND.
13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table, and click Add.
14 Under Factor, and enter 1.2.
15 Under Case or Combination, select DL1.
Add a LL1 combination with a factor
16 Click Add.
18 Under Case or Combination, select LL1.
Add a WIND1 combination with a factor
19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table.

21 Under Case or Combination, select WIND1.
22 Click on the Load Combination table.
23 Select Row 2.
24 Under Type, select Envelope.
25 Under State, select Ultimate.

26 In the Structural Settings dialog, click OK.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, Transfer Project Standards on page 473.
Transfer Project Standards

In this exercise, you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project.
Importing load types and combinations from a previous project

1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project.
2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards.
3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog,
■ Under Copy from, select the file that contains the load table.
■ Scroll down the list of items, and select Load Types.
Transfer Project Standards | 473

■ Click OK.
4 In the Duplicate Types dialog, click Overwrite.

6 On the Structural Settings dialog, click the Load Combinations tab.

The load combinations are displayed.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Documenting the Analytical Model on page 475.
Documenting the Analytical Model

In this exercise, you document the analysis by adding an annotation, and creating an analytical schedule.
Add annotation
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Structural Plans, and double-click Level 2 -
Analytical.
3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag.
Documenting the Analytical Model | 475

4 Click the Area Load to place the tag.

6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown.

Create a load schedule
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click on the Design Bar, and click View.
8 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Line Loads and click OK.
Define the fields

10 Under Available fields, select Fx 1 and click Add.
The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields.
11 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ Fx 2
■ Fy 1
■ Fy 2
■ Fz 1
■ Fz 2
■ Nature
12 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them
and clicking Move Up or Move Down.
Documenting the Analytical Model | 477

13 Click OK.
A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project.

15 Proceed to the next exercise, Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page
478.
Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model

There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis
and design software. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and
design software. For this reason, the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those
elements that it joins. In addition, Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to
their original location relative to the corresponding physical model.
end of that exercise, m_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt
Align the analytical beam

1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level - Analytical.
2 Zoom into the column at grid line F - 3.

3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model.
4 Press TAB, and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam.
5 Press TAB, and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab.
Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 479

The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis
purposes.

7 Proceed to the next exercise, Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on
page 480.
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model

The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct
integration with structural analysis and design software. Revit Structure provides the capability to
automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created
elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements.
NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural
elements within a project.
■ Creating beams
The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. For example, setting both planes to level
2 as shown:
■ Creating columns
Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown:
■ Creating slabs and walls

Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls, despite any variation in wall
thicknesses or projection plane location as shown:
If a wall and slab are joined, the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with
the slab analytical model as shown:
If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets), it can be excluded
in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members.
Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 481

If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model, the exterior of the wall
can be defined as the analytical projection plane, or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model
of the slab as shown:
NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate
the auto-detect feature.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect.rvt.
Auto-detect tolerances

2 In the Structural Settings dialog, select the Analytical Model Settings tab.
This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. They
include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments, and the
auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes.
3 Click OK.

Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset
1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 2.
2 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure
as shown.
4 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around one of the beams.
5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown.

The dot located at the top of the beam, represents the vertical projection plane of the beam
analytical model.
6 Click the beam, and on the Option Bar, click .
NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. For demo purposes, a single
beam is selected
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Vertical Projection, select
Auto-detect, and then click OK.
The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab.
8 Click the slab, and on the Option Bar, click .

9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Vertical Projection, select Top of
Slab, and then click OK.

The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab.
The dot located at the top of the slab, represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical
model.
Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset
10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 2 - Analytical.
11 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3.
12 In an empty part of the drawing area, right-click, and click Zoom in Region.
13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown.
Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with
the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column.

14 Click the column, and on the Option Bar, click .
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Horizontal Projection, select
The horizontal projection plane for the column, aligns with the horizontal projection plane of
the wall.
16 On the Tools toolbar, click (Join Geometry), select the wall, and then select the column.
The geometry of the column and wall are now joined.
Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types
18 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the
lower-right side of the structure as shown.


Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. These lines represent the vertical projection plane
of the upper and lower wall analytical model. The dotted green line represents reference plane
1.
20 Move the cursor over the lower wall.

21 Press TAB, and select Chain of Walls or Lines.
Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall.
22 On the Option Bar, click .


The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane
of the upper wall.
25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown.
26 Click the upper wall, and on the Option Bar, click .

27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Horizontal Projection, select Plane
1, and then click OK.

The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical
projection plane 1.
Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab
28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section), double-click Section 3.
30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column.

The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab, and the green line represents the
analytical model of the wall. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam.
31 Click the lower wall, and on the Option Bar, click .

32 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Top Vertical Projection, select
The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection
plane of the slab.
Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall

34 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Vertical Projection, select Bottom
of Slab, and then click OK.

The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical
projection plane of the wall (green line). Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the
analytical line of the slab.

36 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 2 - Analytical, and then click Open View.
You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area.
37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown.

39 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Analytical Slab Edge, select
In the Revit dialog, click No.
41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section), double-click Section 3.

Exterior Face, and then click OK.

The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall.
Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection
44 Click the column, and on the Option Bar, click .

45 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, select Auto-Detect Horizontal
Projection, and then click OK.

47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Analytical Model, for Top Vertical Projection, select Top
of Wall, and then click OK.

The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of
the wall (green line).
Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam
48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - Analytical.

49 Enter ZF.
Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. Close any additional open windows.
52 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left
corner of both views as shown.

53 Click the beam, and on the Option Bar, click .
Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views.
Auto-Detect, and then click OK.
55 In the Level 3 window, do the following:
■ Move the cursor over the beam.
■ Press TAB, and select the beam shape handle.

Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam.
■ Extend each end of the beam as shown.

Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged.

57 Proceed to the next exercise, Boundary Conditions on page 497.

Boundary Conditions
In this exercise, you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions.rvt.
Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column
1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views, double-click View 1 - Analytical.

2 Enter ZF.
4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog, under Visibility, clear Structural Foundation, click Apply, and
then click OK.
6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown.
7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Boundary Conditions.
8 On the Options Bar, click (Point Boundary Condition), and for State, select Fixed.
10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns.
11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point
boundary condition.
Boundary Conditions | 497

12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown.
13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols, press CTRL, and select the other symbol.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Structural Analysis, for State, select Pinned, and then
click OK.

Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol.
Add a line boundary condition to the footing
16 Enter ZF.
17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown.
18 On the Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the foundation.
19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Boundary Conditions.
20 On the Options Bar, click (Line Boundary Condition), and for State, select Pinned.
21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line
boundary condition.
Boundary Conditions | 499

23 Proceed to the next exercise, Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party
Analysis Software on page 500.
Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party

Analysis Software
Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software, via an Application Programming Interface (API).
Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion, member
relocation, or member addition, that you confirm in the analysis software, are imported back into Revit
Structure. All views, including structural plans, elevations, sections, and detail sheets are updated according
to changes that you import into Revit Structure. In addition, some internal analysis software parameters are
imported into Revit Structure.
Export the model to analysis software
1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model.
NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software
application has been installed. For more information, click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners.
The application programming interface (API) starts. You can open the analysis software or write
to an export file for later use. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your
model, the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it.
2 Proceed to the next tutorial, Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 501.

Exporting Revit
Structure Files 15
Your Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. In this tutorial, you
learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers.
You can export a 2D view (plan, elevation, section, etc.), sheet, or schedule into AutoCAD, or you can export a 3D view
directly into AutoCAD Architecture. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images.
Exporting CAD Formats

In this lesson, you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing
the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007. Revit Structure, maintains the properties of all structural elements
as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a
DWG format, which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. Finally, you export sheets from the project and import
them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images.
Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007

Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Export.rvt.
Export CAD formats

1 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D - Atrium.
501
2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats.
NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view.
3 In the Export dialog, do the following:

■ Under Save in, select a folder on your local computer.
■ Under File naming, click Short.

The existing file name is automatically shortened.
■ Under Save as type, select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*.dwg).
■ Click Options.
4 In the Export Options dialog, do the following:

■ Under Solids (3D views only), select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP
Options.
502 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files

■ Under Prefer, select AutoCAD Architecture objects.
■ Click OK.
5 On the Export dialog, click Save.

View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007
6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007.
NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.

8 Navigate to the file location, and click Open.
Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 503

When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007, the Revit Structure model appears as
shown.
Revit Structure columns, beams, and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD
Architecture structural member.
9 Select a beam as shown, and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element.
10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program.

11 In Revit Structure, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the model to a location of your choice
using the following filename: m_RST_Export-in progress.rvt.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 505

Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD
Training File
■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise, m_RST_Export-in progress.rvt.

■ Under File naming, click Long (Specify prefix for all exports).
■ Under File name, clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2.
■ Under Save as type, select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*.dwg).
■ Click Save.
Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 505

If the view was set to wireframe, a warning dialog appears. On the View’s export mode dialog,
click Hidden Line Removal.
View the 2D file
4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program.

6 Navigate to the file location, and click Open.
When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007, the Revit Structure
exported Level 3 Plan appears.
7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program.

8 In Revit Structure, click File menu ➤ Save.
9 Proceed to the next exercise, Exporting Sheets on page 506
Exporting Sheets
Training File
■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise, m_RST_Export-in progress.rvt.

Export sheets

■ Under Export Range, click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select.
3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog, do the following:

■ Under Show, clear Views.
■ Select each sheet, and click OK.

Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session.
NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file, you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or
sheet as a single file option as shown. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not
available for DGN or SAT files.
4 On the Export dialog, click Save.
Exporting Sheets | 507

If the view was set to wireframe, a warning dialog appears. On the View’s export mode dialog,
click Hidden Line Removal.
5 Close the Revit Structure file. If you wish to save the changes, navigate to a folder of your
preference and rename the file.
View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007
6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program.

8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise, and click Open.

When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture, they appear as shown.
Exporting Sheets | 509

510
About Families and the
Family Editor 16
All elements in Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 are “family based.” The term family describes a powerful concept used
throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple
types defined within it, each with a different size, shape, material set, or other parameter variables as designed by the
family creator. Even though various types within a family can look different, they are still related and come from a single
source, thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected
in every instance of that family or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and
effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.
In this tutorial, you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.
Using Families and the Family Editor

One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components
without having to learn a complex programming language. Using the Family Editor, you create a family
within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type.
You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry.
In this lesson, you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how
they are created. You also learn about the Family Editor, and when and how to use it.
Introduction to Families
Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .rfa extension. All different
types that you create are stored with the master family file. For example, if you create a family called wide
beams that includes types with several sizes, the types would all be saved as one file which can then be
loaded into any project. The different file types become much easier to manage, because there is only one
file to track. There are, however, exceptions to this rule. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit
Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Walls, and roofs are examples
of these types of families. In addition, there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or
form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type,
such as a curved beam.
Revit Structure has three types of families:
■ System
511
■ Standard Component
■ In-place
System Families
System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as
walls, floors, and roofs. The basic walls system family, for example, has wall types that define interior,
exterior, foundation, generic, and partition wall styles. You can duplicate and modify existing system families,
but you cannot create new system families.
NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another.
The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.
Standard Component Families
Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates, while many more are stored in
component libraries. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. You can either
duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of
family templates.
The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design
project.
Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Host-based families have components that require
hosts. Standalone families include columns, and beam. Family templates assist you in creating and
manipulating component families.
Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. You
can load them into projects, transfer them from one project to another, and save them from a project file
to your library if needed.
512 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor

The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall, and also a standalone pile cap family
component.
In-place Families
In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You create in-place
families only within the current project, so they are useful for objects unique to that project; for example,
custom step footing. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families, and the category
that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project.
The following illustration shows an in-place step footing.
Introduction to Families | 513

Add a family to a project
1 Open or start a project.
To add a family to your project, you can drag it into the document window, or you can load it
using the Load From Library, Load Family command on the File menu. After the family has
been loaded in the project, it is saved with the project. Families are listed in the Project Browser
under their respective component category. You do not have to carry the original family file
along with the project. However, if you change the original family, reload the family in the
project to see the updated family.
2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.

3 Navigate to the library or location of the family.
4 Select the family file name and click Open.
In this section, you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. In
the final exercise, you learn about the Family Editor, how to access it, and when to use it.
Introduction to the Family Editor

You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation
components. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and
three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. Family element visibility can be dependent of your
viewing direction, such as plan, elevation, or 3D, as well as the level of detail associated with that view.
In this exercise, you learn when to use the Family Editor, how to access it, and the general procedure for
creating a standard component family.
When to use the Family Editor
During the design process, you will need a specific component for your design. In this case, presume it is a
bay window that you require. There is a logical thought process to follow:
1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so, it will be available within the
Type Selector.
2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project, you can search the component library loaded
on your local hard drive. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network.
3 Next, consider checking the Web library and other Web resources, such as newsgroups.
4 If you cannot find the component you require, try to find the component that most closely resembles
it. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from
scratch. If you find a close match, open it in the Family Editor, modify it as needed, and then load it
into the project.
5 Finally, if you have exhausted your external resources, create a component family using one of the
family templates as a starting point.
How to use the Family Editor
You can access the Family Editor in several ways. With Revit Structure open, you can click File ➤ Open,
navigate to a family file, and click Open. When the family opens, it opens within the Family Editor. It will
be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family.
Within the Windows® environment, you can double-click any file with an .rfa extension and it opens Revit
Structure in the Family Editor. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously.
To start a new family, click File ➤ New ➤ Family, select the appropriate template, and click Open.
514 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor

General procedure for creating a standard component family
1 Select the appropriate family template.
2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object.
3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.
4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry.
5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters.
6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior.
7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings.
8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters.
9 Save the newly defined family, and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.
Introduction to the Family Editor | 515

516
Creating Components in
the Family Editor 17
In this tutorial, you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 Families. Using the installed templates,
you create the following families:
■ a custom metal deck profile,

■ a custom castellated beam,
■ a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar,
■ a custom titleblock,
■ and an in-place family for a step-footing.
When you create an in-place family, you create it within the project file, not within the Family template (.rft file). This
allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.
Creating Custom Families

In this lesson, you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. In the first exercise,
you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. In the second exercise,
you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. Modifications to the existing families are saved
as a family (.rft) template for use in other projects.
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family

In this exercise, you create a custom, non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck
profile.
517
Open the metal deck family profile

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\M_Form Deck_Non
Composite.rfa.
4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, do the following:
■ Under Visibility, click Dimensions and Reference Planes.
5 In an empty part of the drawing area, right-click, and click Zoom to Fit.
6 On the View Control Bar, select 1:5 for scale.
Delete vertical reference planes
7 Select parameter wr as shown, and press DELETE.
Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile.
8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown.
518 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Modify the angular reference plane
10 On the Options Bar, click (Create Angular Dimensions).

11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows:
■ Click the horizontal reference plane.
■ Click the angle.
■ Move the cursor inside the profile, and click to place the dimension as shown.
Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 519

13 Select the angled reference plane, enter 66, and press ENTER.
14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal
reference plane.
Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile.
15 In an empty part of the drawing area, right-click, and click Zoom to Fit.
16 On the View Control Bar, select 1:2 for scale.
17 Click the top and bottom dimensions, and drag them approximately as shown.

18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base, and press DELETE.
Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side.
Place new dimensions
19 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and add a dimension as shown.

20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as
shown, and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints.
Sketch the dovetail reference planes
21 On the View Toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile.
23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown.
24 Press ESC.
25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar, click .

26 On the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and
then click OK.
Dimension and constrain the dovetail

28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown.

The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be
customized based on your requirements.
29 Press ESC.
30 Select the horizontal reference plane, click the dimension, and enter 9 mm, and press ENTER.
31 Select the dimension line, and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal
reference plane.
32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown.
These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference
plane.
33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown.

Sketch the dovetail

35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference
planes as shown.
36 Click Modify.
37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split), and click Delete Inner Segment.
38 Using the split tool, trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown.
39 Press ESC.
Create parameters a and b
40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown.
41 On the Options Bar, click Label ➤ Add Parameter.

42 In the Parameters Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, enter a for Name, and then click OK.

43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown.
44 On the Options Bar, click Label ➤ Add Parameter.

45 In the Parameters Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, enter b for Name, and then click OK.
Define wr parameter
46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

47 In the Family Types dialog, do the following:
■ For Name, select 50 X 150 mm.
■ Under Other, for wr, enter 110 mm.
48 Select the dimension as shown.

49 On the Options Bar, click Label, and select wr.
Flex the new dovetail profile

51 In the Family Types dialog, do the following.
■ Under Other, for a, enter 40 mm.
■ Under Other, for b, enter 50 mm.
■ Click Apply.
Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters.
52 On the Toolbar, click (Undo).

Save the new profile
53 Click File ➤ Save As.

54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog, click the Metric Library folder.
55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder, and for File Name, enter M_Form Deck_Non
Composite_Dovetail.rfa, and click Save.
Create new parameters

57 In the Family Types dialog, do the following.
■ Under Family Types, select Rename, and enter 75 x 200 mm, and click OK.
■ Under Other, for a, enter 40 mm.
■ Under Other, for b, enter 50 mm.
■ Under Other, for Sr, enter 200 mm.
58 Click File ➤ Save.

Create a new project

61 In the Choose Template dialog, in the Metric Templates folder, select Structural Analysis-Default
Metric.rte, and click Open.
64 On the Design Bar, click Slab.

67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area.
The slab size should be approximately 17000 mm long by 10600 mm wide.

The slab is created.
Create a section view of the slab
69 On the Design Bar, click Section.

70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown.

72 Select the slab, and in the Type Selector, select Floor: 160mm Concrete with 50mm Metal Deck.
73 On the View Control toolbar, do the following:
■ For Model Graphic Style, select Wireframe.
Apply the custom family to the metal deck
74 Click the Window menu, and open the new family file.
The file should still be open. If it is not, open the file from the saved folder location.
75 On the Families Design Bar, click Load into Project.

The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. If there are multiple
files open, select the slab project from the available files.
76 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click .

78 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select Edit for Structure.
79 In the Edit Assembly dialog, do the following.
■ Under Layers, select Layer 3.
■ Under Structural Deck Properties, for Deck profile, select the new metal deck profile file.
■ Click OK.
80 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.

82 In the Project Browser, under Sections, double-click Section 1.
The new profile is applied to the slab.

83 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 529.
Customizing a Castellated Beam

In this exercise, you create a custom opening in a castellated beam.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Custom_Beam.rvt.
Modify the beam opening
1 On the Options Bar, click , and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the
castellated beam.
2 Select the beam, and on the Options Bar, click .

4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown.
Customizing a Castellated Beam | 529

Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening.
■ e1 = Tee length.
■ e2 = Space between voids (web post length).
■ b = Length of sloped portion.
■ dt1 = Tee depth top beam.
■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam.
5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, do the following:

■ For e1, enter 200 mm.
■ For e2, enter 100 mm.
■ For b, enter 100 mm.
■ For dt1, enter 50 mm.
■ For dt2, enter 50 mm.

Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters.
7 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 531.
Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout

In this exercise, you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar.
Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Metric 2D Rebar Shape
Template.rft.
Sketch the rebar
3 On the Design Bar, click Rebar Lines.
4 On the Options Bar, click (Draw).

5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line, as follows:
■ Click to the right of the vertical reference plane, and draw a horizontal line to create the top
surface of the rebar.
■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop.
Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 531

■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar.
■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop.
■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch.

Place dimensions

8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown.
Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions.
9 Press ESC.
Create parameter labels
10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown.

11 On the Options Bar, for Label, select B.
12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown.
13 On the Options Bar, for Label, select C.

14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown.

15 On the Options Bar, for Label, select D.
16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown.
17 On the Options Bar, for Label, select C.

18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown.

19 On the Options Bar, for Label, select B.
Save the new profile
20 Click File ➤ Save As.

21 Navigate to a folder of your choice.
22 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Square, and click Save.

25 In the Metric Templates folder, in the Choose Template dialog, select Structural Analysis-Default
Sketch a slab

You are now in Sketch mode.

31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area.
The slab is created.
Load the overlapping rebar into the new project
33 Click the Window menu, and be certain that the Square.rfa file is open.
The file should still be open. If it is not, open the file from the saved folder location.
34 On the Families Design Bar, click Load into Projects.

35 In the Load into Projects dialog, select the new project, and click OK.
The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project.

The Rebar Shape Browser launches, positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. This browser
rebar shape is highlighted, and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar.
NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar.
Place rebar parallel to the slab
37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser, scroll down the list of available shapes, and select Rebar
Shape: Square.
38 On the Options Bar, for Placement Plane, select Near Cover Reference.
Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab.

42 Click ESC.
Modify rebar layout

Notice that the rebar shape handles appear.
45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown.

47 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating In-Place Families on page 539.
Creating In-Place Families

In this lesson, you start with an incomplete foundation wall. Because in-place families interact with the
structural model according to their assigned family category, you create an in-place family in your current
project rather than in the Family (.rft) template.
Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family

In this exercise, you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_In-Place-Footing.rvt.
Place the foundation wall
1 In the Project Browser, click 3D Views ➤ 3D.

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Foundation ➤ Wall.
3 In the Type Selector, select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing - 900 x 300.
Creating In-Place Families | 539

4 Click the foundation wall.
The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall.
Create new family category
6 On the Options Bar, click , and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown.
7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Create.

8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, select Structural Foundations, and click OK.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name, and click OK.
10 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
11 In the Work Plane dialog, select Pick a plane, and click OK.
12 Press TAB, and select the bearing footing as shown.

Make sure the entire footing is selected.
Sketch the extrusion
13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown.
14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure, sketch a solid extrusion as shown.
Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 541

The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only.
15 On the Options Bar, for Depth, enter -900 mm.

Change extrusion properties
17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties.

18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the value for Material.
19 In the Materials dialog, for Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete, and then click OK.
22 On the Family Design Bar, click Finish Family.
Copy extrusion
23 Select the extrusion.
24 On the Options Bar, click , and select Multiple.

25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown.
26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown.

27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.
28 Press ESC.

Join extrusion elements to the footing
29 On the Options Bar, click (Join Geometry), and click Multiple Join.
30 Select the wall foundation as shown.
31 Select the lower extrusion as shown.
32 Select the middle extrusion as shown.
33 Select the upper extrusion as shown.

Join extrusion elements to each other
35 On the Options Bar, click (Join Geometry), and click Multiple Join.
36 Select the middle extrusion as shown.
37 Select the lower extrusion as shown.
38 Select the upper extrusion as shown.

39 Press ESC.
40 In the Project Browser, click 3D Views ➤ 3D.
Creating a Titleblock Family

In this lesson, you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template.

The titleblock has linework, text, and labels. You customize the titleblock with a new text style, graphics,
and your project data.
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet

In this exercise, you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet.
Create a new family based on the default titleblock template
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock.

2 In the New dialog, navigate to the Titleblocks folder, select A0 metric.rft, and click Open.
The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines.
Sketch the inside border
4 On the Options Bar, click , and enter -25 for Offset.

5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner, and then specify the
lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 547

Add vertical and horizontal lines
6 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 140 for Offset.

7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line, and click to draw a new vertical line.
8 On the Options Bar, click , and click .

9 Enter 0 for Offset.
10 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown.
11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown.
12 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and, while pressing CTRL, select the second and third horizontal
lines.
14 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet.
17 In the Type Selector, select Title Blocks.

18 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 20 for Offset.
19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm
below the existing line.
20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm
21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm
22 On the Options Bar, enter 30 for Offset.

23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm
above the existing line.
24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm
25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm

27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet.
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 549

The titleblock linework is now complete.
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock

In this exercise, you add a company logo, text notes, and labels to your titleblock.
Add a company logo
1 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Image.

2 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training/Common, select Company Logo.jpg, and click Open.
3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown.
4 Zoom in on the logo.

Create a new 10mm text style
5 On the Design Bar, click Text.

9 In the Name dialog, enter 10 mm Bold for Name, and click OK.
10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Text, enter 10 for Text Size, and select Bold.
11 Click OK twice.
Add company name text
12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown.
13 Enter Arch Design Inc. in the text box.

14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.
Add company address and phone number text
15 In the Type Selector, select Text: 8mm.

16 Draw a text box below the initial text, and add an address and phone number as shown.
Press ENTER to add each new line of text, and click outside of the text box to complete the text.
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 551

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the last text note.
18 Select the drag handle, and drag the text note down as shown.
19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification.

Add consultant name, address, and phone number text

21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line, and enter the following text:
■ Consultant:
■ Address:
■ Address:
■ Telephone:
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the consultant text note.

24 On the Options Bar, select Constrain and Multiple.
25 Click inside the Consultant text group.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm, and click to specify the first copied text note position.
27 Move the cursor down another 120mm, and click to specify the second copied text note location.

Create a new 5mm text style

32 In the Name dialog, enter 5 mm for Name, and click OK.
33 In the Type Properties dialog, under Text, enter 5 for Text Size.
34 Click OK twice.
Add drawing data text
35 In the Type Selector, select Text: 5mm.

36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock, and enter Sheet Number.
37 Draw a text box in the next space up, and enter Checked By.
38 Draw a text box in the next space up, and enter Drawn By.
39 Draw a text box in the next space up, and enter Date.

Add drawing data labels
40 On the Design Bar, click Label.

41 On the Options Bar, select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment.
42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field, and click to specify the label location.
43 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Project Issue Date, and click OK.
The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.
44 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field, and click to specify the label
location.
46 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Drawn By, and click OK.
47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field, and click to specify the label
location.
48 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Checked By and click OK.
Create a new 15mm label style

53 In the Name dialog, under Text, enter 15 mm Label for Name, and click OK.
54 In the Type Properties dialog, enter 15 for Text Size.

55 Click OK twice.
Add sheet number and project data labels
56 In the Type Selector, select Label: 15mm Label.

57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field, and click to specify the
label location.
58 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Sheet Number, and click OK.
59 On the Options Bar, click Center and Middle.

60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field, and click to specify the label
location.
61 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Project Number, and click OK.
63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field, and click to specify
the label location.
64 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Project Name, and click OK.
66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field, and click to specify
the label location.
67 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Client Name, and click OK.

Create a 4mm label style

73 In the Name dialog, enter 4 mm Label, and click OK.
74 In the Type Properties dialog, under Text, enter 4 for Text Size.
75 Click OK twice.
Add Project Path label
76 In the Type Selector, select 4mm Label.

77 On the Options Bar, click Left and Middle.
78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field, and click to
specify the label location.
79 In the Select Parameter dialog, select File Path, and click OK.
80 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is
approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field.
81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa.
The titleblock graphics, text, and labels are now complete.

Adding the Titleblock to a New Project
In this exercise, you add the titleblock that you created to a new project.
Load the new titleblock family into a new project

2 In the New Project dialog, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog, select Training.
Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte
file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog, click OK.
4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click Load.
5 In the Open dialog, navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa file, select it,
and click Open.
6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.
7 Click OK.
Modify titleblock properties

10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter Name for Drawn By, and click OK.
11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet.
Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 559

12 On the Settings menu, click Project Information.
■ For Project Issue Date, enter January 1, 2005.
■ For Project Status, enter In progress.
■ For Client Name, enter Jane Smith.
■ For Project Name, enter Office Building.
■ For Project Number, enter 2005-01.
14 Click OK.
This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson.

Truss Building
18
In this tutorial, you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Autodesk Revit Structure 2009.
Working with Trusses

In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool, which creates the truss according
to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. The lines in the layout
determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord, bottom chord, and web
members. To use the Truss tool, you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and
endpoint in the drawing. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw
the truss, placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. This lesson comprises the
following truss building exercises:
■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans
■ Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters
■ Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof
■ Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor
■ Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure
Adding Trusses to a Project

In this exercise, you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Add_Truss.rvt.
Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view

2 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left
corner of the model as shown.
561
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Truss.
4 In the Type Selector, select M_Howe Flat Truss: Standard.

■ Under Structural, for Bearing Chord, select Top.
■ Under Dimensions, for Truss Height, enter 1900 mm.
■ Click OK.
7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span.
8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span.
562 | Chapter 18 Truss Building

The truss is placed between the columns. Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will
not be necessary for this span.
Modify the truss
10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown.
11 Press DELETE.
Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned.
12 Using the same method, delete the extra flange at column location A1.
Copy the single truss

14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps.
Adding Trusses to a Project | 563

15 On the View toolbar, click (Copy).
16 On the Options bar, select Multiple.
17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown.
18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss.

21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).
Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure

23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2.
24 While pressing CTRL, select the remaining trusses.
25 On the View toolbar, click (Copy).

26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point, and then click the column
at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown.

29 Enter ZF.
Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view


■ Under Structural, for Bearing Chord, select Top.
■ Under Dimensions, for Truss Height, enter 1900 mm.
■ Click OK.
34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown.

35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown.

36 Enter ZF.
37 Using the same method, add trusses between columns C1- C4, and D1- D4.

39 Enter ZF.

Modify each truss
40 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as
shown
41 Select the flange at one end of the truss.

42 Press DELETE.
43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned.
44 Using the same method, delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss, and repeat for
the remaining trusses.
You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise, a new training file is supplied.
46 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing Truss Parameters on page 570.
Customizing Truss Parameters

In this exercise, you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type
parameters.
Training File
Metric\m_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters.rvt.
Create a new truss type for the short span


6 In the Name dialog, enter M_Howe Flat Truss - Short Span, and click OK.
■ Under Vertical Webs, for Structural Framing Type, select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section:
HSS203.2X203.2X9.5.
■ Under Diagonal Webs, for Structural Framing Type, select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section:
HSS203.2X203.2X9.5.
■ Under Bottom Chords, for Angle, enter 90.
■ Click OK.

Apply the new truss type
10 On the View toolbar, click , draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses, and then
select the truss as shown.
NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web.
11 In the Type Selector, select M_Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss - Short Span.
The truss changes to the new type.
12 Using the same method, change the remaining short trusses to the new type.

14 Enter ZF.
Customizing Truss Parameters | 571

Create a new truss type for the roof span


20 In the Name dialog, enter M_Howe Flat Truss - Roof Span, and click OK.
■ Under Vertical Webs, for Structural Framing Type, select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section:
HSS203.2X203.2X9.5.
■ Under Diagonal Webs, for Structural Framing Type, select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section:
HSS203.2X203.2X9.5.
■ Click OK.

Apply the new truss type
24 On the View toolbar, click , draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses, and then
select the truss as shown.

NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange.
25 In the Type Selector, select M_Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss - Roof Span.
The truss changes to the new type.
26 Using the same method, change the remaining long trusses to the new type.

28 Enter ZF.
Customizing Truss Parameters | 573

30 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 574.
Modifying the Shape of a Truss

In this exercise, you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Truss_Change_Shape.rvt.
Select all trusses

2 On the View toolbar, click , draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the
structure, and then select the truss as shown.

3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances.
All instances of the truss will be highlighted.
Attach the roof
4 On the Options Bar, click (Attach/Detach Top Chord).

5 Select the roof as shown.
Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 575

The top chords, vertical webs, and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of
the roof.

View the custom truss
7 Select the roof.

8 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.
9 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown.
Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile.
10 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 577.

Creating a Custom Truss Family
In this exercise, you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RST_Truss_Custom_Family.rvt.
Open the truss family
1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
3 Open Metric_Structural_Trusses.rft located in the Metric folder.
Sketch web reference planes

5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown.
6 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown.
7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints.
Creating a Custom Truss Family | 577

8 Using the same method, place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern
as shown.
Sketch top and bottom chords
9 On the Design Bar, click Truss Top Chord.

10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown.
11 On the Design Bar, Truss Bottom Chord.

12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown.
Sketch truss webs
13 On the Design Bar, click Truss Web.

14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start
point of the first truss web as shown.
15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown.
16 Using the same method, add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown.

Save the new truss family

■ For Save in, navigate to a folder of your choice.
■ For File name, enter M_Custom_Truss.
■ For Save as type, select Family Files (rfa).
■ Click OK.
Load the truss into the project
20 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.

21 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_RST_Truss_Custom_Family.rvt, and click OK.
You are now in the project file.
Place the custom truss

23 On the Design Bar, click Truss.
24 In the Type Selector, select M_Custom_Truss.
25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss.
26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown.

28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown.

30 Proceed to the next exercise, Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 582.
Building a Truss with Drafting Tools

In this exercise, you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool, create
column grids, and a framing elevation. Finally, you add braces to form the steel truss.

3 In the Choose Template dialog, in the Metric Templates folder, select Structural Analysis-Default
Create grids

7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown.

Add framing elevations
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Framing Elevation.

9 Select each grid line, and place approximately as shown.
Place support columns
10 On the Design Bar, click Structural Column.

11 In the Type Selector, select Universal Column: 305x305x97UC.
12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 21000 mm apart as shown.
(The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only.)
13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol, and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown
.
Sketch horizontal reference planes
14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Interior Elevation), double-click Elevation 1 - a.

16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2.
17 Click the dimension, enter 1500 mm, and press ENTER.
Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 583

The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only.
18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first.

19 Click the dimension, and enter 4500 mm.
Place vertical reference planes

21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond
the top horizontal plane as shown.
22 Press ESC.
Place multiple reference planes using the array tool
23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown.

24 On the Tools toolbar, click .
25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point.
26 Drag the array to the right, and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array
length.
27 Enter 7 for array count, and press ENTER.
The array is complete.
Place top and bottom chords
28 On the Design Bar, click Beam.

29 In the Type Selector, select Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB.

30 On the Tools toolbar, select 3D Snapping.
31 Using reference planes as a guide, create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams
as shown.
When placing beams, make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes.
Place braces
32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Brace.

33 In the Type Selector, select Universal Beam: 254x102x28UB.
34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide, create cross-braces by placing braces as shown.
When placing braces, make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes.
Fix corner joint
truss as shown.

37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace, and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown.

39 Select the vertical ref plane, then select the edge of the top chord as shown.

40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown.
View the truss

The completed truss is displayed.

43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice.
You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial.

590
Creating Multiple Design
Options 19
When working with a building model, it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These
schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options, you create multiple design
schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main
model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option), you can study and modify each design option
and present the options to the client.
In this tutorial, you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project

You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. At any time in the
design process, you can have multiple sets of design options, and each option set can have multiple schemes.
For example, you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In
addition, you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design
schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design, you can designate a primary design scheme for
each option set.
In this particular case, the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The
client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or
materials. The client has asked you to create various options.
591
In the first exercise in this lesson, you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to
the structural design option set. In the second exercise, you create two roof system design options that work
with the structural options. In the final exercise of this lesson, you learn how to manage and organize the
design options, make your final design decision, and delete the unwanted options from the project. These
three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on
the completion of the previous exercise.
Creating the Structural Design Options

In this exercise, you set up multiple design option sets, each with multiple design options. After setting up
the design option sets and their subordinate options, you design each of the structural options. The first
option is a simple combination of columns and beams. With the second option, you create a unique in-place
family as the structural system.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Urban_House.rvt.
Create first design option
1 On the Tools menu, click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project, the only available command
is to create a new option set. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Each
option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being
considered. After you create a design option, you can edit it. Any new elements introduced at
that time become part of that option.
2 In the Design Options dialog, under Option Set, click New.

Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). This option will
be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars.
TIP In this exercise, the roof and structure systems must work together; therefore, each is constructed
for interchangeability.
3 Select Option 1 (primary), click Edit Selected, and click Close.

Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option.
592 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options

4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click ROOF TERRACE.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and zoom in on the upper half of the building
model.
6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Column.
7 In the Type Selector, select Round Column: 75mm Diameter.
8 Using the following illustration as a guide, add three columns. Arrows and the dimension lines
have been added for training purposes only. The left column should be centered at the
intersection of the notch and the wall, the second column directly across from it at the
intersection of the two walls, and the third column centered between the two.
TIP To center the middle column, either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it,
or add a dimension string between the columns, and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments.
You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column.

10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them
individually while holding CTRL.

12 On the Options Bar, select:
■ Constrain
■ Copy
■ Multiple
The Copy command is a two-click process. The first click specifies the reference point on the
element to be copied, and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference
point is copied to. In this case, the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x
4 grid of 12 columns. By selecting Multiple, you can continue adding new copies without
reselecting the reference point (the first click). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and
helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.
13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch.

14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Because it is important that you select
the same location on the notches you copy to, make sure you select a point that is easily
recognizable. In the following illustration, the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.
Creating the Structural Design Options | 593

TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse.
15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.
16 Zoom in around the notch construction, and click in the same location as you did for the
previous notch.
A copy of the three selected columns is added.
17 Zoom out and, using the same technique, add a copy of the columns to the next two notches
below this one. When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.
Because of the size of the columns, they are difficult to see in this view.

Notice the 12 columns that you added.
Next, you add the beams that span the columns.
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click TOP OF CORE.

20 On the tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
Adding a beam is a two-click process. The first click specifies the beam start point. The second
click specifies the end of the beam.
21 In the Type Selector, select Round Bar : 50mm.

22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps:
■ Zoom in on the upper-left column, and click at its center to set the beam start point.
■ Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.
■ Zoom in on the upper right column, and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.
Use the following illustration as a guide. In it, two callouts with thin lines have been added to
clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.

24 Select the Beam you added previously.
The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. You can do this manually or use
the Copy command.

26 On the Options Bar, select:
■ Constrain
■ Copy
■ Multiple
27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch, and click the center
point.
This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.
28 Zoom out, move down to the next set of columns, zoom into the left column, and select the
center of the column to add a copy.
29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.

Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof.
Organize design option sets and subordinate options

32 In the Design Options dialog, notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary).
33 Click Finish Editing.
34 In the Design Options dialog, under Option, click New.
NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option, not a new option set.
35 Select Option 1 (primary) and, under Option, click Rename.

36 In the Rename dialog, enter Brackets for New, and click OK.
37 Select Option 2 and, under Option, click Rename.
38 In the Rename dialog, enter Beam for New, and click OK.
39 Select Option Set 1 and, under Option Set, click Rename.
40 In the Rename dialog, enter Structure for New, and click OK.
Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.
41 Under Option Set, click New.

42 Select Option Set 1 and, under Option Set, click Rename.
43 In the Rename dialog, enter Roofing for New, and click OK.
44 Select the option set Roofing and, under Option, click New.
There should now be two roofing design options.
45 Under Roofing, select Option 1 (primary).

46 Under Option, click Rename, name the option Louvers, and click OK.

47 Under Roofing, select Option 2.
48 Under Option, click Rename, name the option Sunscreen, and click OK.
You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design
option names. This allows you to more easily manage the project.
Design the second structural design option
49 In this section of the exercise, you create the second design option. When finished, it will
resemble the following illustration.
50 In the Design Options dialog, under Structure, select Beam.

51 Under Edit, select Edit Selected.
Under Now Editing, notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.
52 Click Close.
Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.
53 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click ROOF TERRACE.

54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs.

55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
56 In the Type Selector, select M_Roof Beam.
57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.
58 On the Tools menu, click Align.

Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be
aligned to. The second click represents the plane that is moved.
59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking
the lower edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration.

60 After aligning the beam, click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.
62 Select the beam and, on the Edit toolbar, click .

■ Clear Group and Associate
■ Enter 4 for number
■ Select 2nd for Move To:
■ Select Constrain
Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second
click represents the move end point.
64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.
65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the
beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.

68 In the Design Options dialog, click Finish Editing.
Notice that even before you close the dialog, the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather
than the structural beams you just created.
That is because the brackets option is set to primary, which is visible by default. Design option
visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.
69 Click Close.
70 On the File menu, click Save As.
71 Navigate to your preferred directory, name the file, m_Urban_House-in progress.rvt, and click Save.
NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise, you need this file in its current state. You can
leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.

In this exercise, you set up multiple design option sets, each with multiple design options to pick from. After
setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options, you designed each of the structural options:
one for brackets, the other for beams. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. With
the second option, you created a unique in-place family as the structural system.
In the next exercise, you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.
Creating the Roof System Design Options

In this exercise, you design each of the roofing options. The first option, a Louver system, is constructed of
50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. The second roofing system, Sunscreen, is a simple
fabric roof created using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each
of the structural design options.
This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. All are sequential
and dependent on the previous exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial, do so
now.
Create the first roofing design option

1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open, open
it now. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress.rvt.

3 In the Design Options dialog, under Roofing, select Louvers (primary).
4 Under Edit, click Edit Selected.
Under Now Editing, Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display.
5 Click Close.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click TOP OF CORE.
8 In the Type Selector, select Rafter 50mm x 250mm.
9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns
and the beam traversing the span.
10 Referring to the following illustration, place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap
the horizontal beam 900 mm.
The dimensions shown are for training purposes. If you need to add dimensions, delete them
after the rafter is in place.

12 Select the rafter you added previously.

14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter 11750 mm for Length, and click OK.
The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.
15 On the Edit menu, click Array.

16 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Clear Group and Associate.
■ Enter 5 for Number.
■ Select 2nd for Move To.
■ Select Constrain.
You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart.
17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam; click in
the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.
Creating the Roof System Design Options | 603

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and, when the listening dimension displays, enter
990, and press ENTER.
Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

Add the louvers to the design option

20 In the Type Selector, select Louver 50mm x 150mm.
21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the louver you just placed.

24 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter 5475 mm for Length, and click OK.
The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.
25 With the louver still selected, click the Edit menu, and click Array.
26 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Clear Group and Associate.
■ Enter 34 for Number.
■ Select 2nd for Move To.
■ Select Constrain.
27 For the array starting point, click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the
beam.

28 Move the cursor vertically downward, and, when the listening dimension displays, enter 300,
and press Enter.
Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.

The louver roof system is complete.

31 In the Design Options dialog, under Edit, click Finish Editing.
The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.
Create sunscreen roof system
32 In the Design Options dialog, under Roofing, select Sunscreen.

33 Under Editing, click Edit Selected, and then click Close.
Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays.
34 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click West.

35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place.
36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.
37 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name, and click OK.
The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose
and is hidden in all views.
38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Click OK.
Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it, you only need to sketch a single
line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. In this case, you must create a
draped canvas sunscreen. Therefore, the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends
where they connect to the columns.

This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. The first two points define the ends
of the line, and the third point defines the arc.
41 Select the top of the left column, the top of the next column on the right, and then adjust the
dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary
dimension value immediately after you create the line.
42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.
NOTE As you sketch the arcs, try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible, then you
can modify it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly
connect. You will fix this in a later step.

44 In the Element Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type.
■ Under Constraints, enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start.
■ Under Constraints, enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End.
45 Click OK.
The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where
they connect to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.
46 On the Tools menu, click Trim/Extend.

47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Select the right arc, then the center arc.
The arcs should connect.

The louver roof system is complete.
You have completed the sunscreen roof system.

51 In the Design Options dialog, under Edit, click Finish Editing, and then click Close.
52 On the File menu, click Save.
NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise, you need this file in its current state. You can
leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.
In this exercise, you designed each of the roofing options. The first option, a Louver system, was constructed
of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. The second roofing system, Sunscreen, was a
simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction
with each of the structural design options.
Managing Design Options

In this exercise, you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display
the various combinations. After exploring the combinations, you select a design, make it part of the building
model, and delete the discarded design options.
This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. All are sequential
and dependent on the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial,
do so now.
Create new views for each design option

1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views.
Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs, you must create a
named 3D view for the primary, secondary, tertiary, and last options.
2 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Primary Option, and click OK.
4 In the Project Browser, right-click the 3D View Primary Option, and click Duplicate. Repeat this
step two more times until you have three copies of the view.
Managing Design Options | 609

5 Right-click each of the copies, and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows:
■ Secondary Option
■ Tertiary Option
■ Last Option
6 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option.
8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. This ensures that the primaries (currently
bracket and louver) are visible.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Secondary Option.
13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, and click OK.

14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Tertiary Option.
17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option,
and click OK.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Last Option.
21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option,
and click OK.
At this point, all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed
to the client.
In this case, the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system
coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In your design options, the beam
and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.
Managing Design Options | 611

23 In the Design Options dialog, under Structure, select Beam.
24 Under Option, select Make Primary. This was the client choice for structural.
Because the client has selected the design option, the current primaries are no longer options;
but should be accepted as part of the building model.
25 Select Structure.
26 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary.
An alert is displayed, asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options
in this option set and remove the option set.
27 In the alert dialog, click Yes.

The set is deleted, the beam option becomes part of the model, and you get a dialog asking if
you want to delete dedicated option views.
28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete to remove the views that used options,
since you no longer need them.
29 Select Roofing.
30 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model, delete the other
design option geometry and any dedicated option views.
31 In the alert dialog, click Yes.
32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete.
33 In the Design Options dialog, click Close.
34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option. The other options were
removed along with any dedicated option views.
The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model.

In this exercise, you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display
the various combinations. After exploring the combinations, you selected a design, made it part of the
building model, and deleted the discarded design options.

Linking Building Models
and Sharing Coordinates 20
Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus, or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.
In these situations, you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while
allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. This maximizes efficiency, performance,
and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger
context.
Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates:
■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures.

■ A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.
■ Comparison of alternatives on a site.
In this tutorial, you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.
You position the building models on the site plan, modify their visibility, and manage the links throughout the project.
In the final lesson, you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.
613
Linking Building Models
In this lesson, you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link
multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models
on the site, modify their visibility, and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project
files.
NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files

In this exercise, you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link two
building models to the project. One building model is a condominium, and the other is a townhouse.
Placement options when linking building models
When you link a building model in a project, you have the option to manually place the linked building
model or allow Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it.
Automatic placement options:
■ Auto - Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the
model.
NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as the
footprint of your model changes.
614 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ Auto - Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit
Structure model.
■ Auto - By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates, this
option will place the link at a predefined location.
RELATED See the lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 631.
Manual placement options:
■ Manual - Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.
NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system; however, this system is not exposed to the
user.
■ Manual - Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. This option is grayed out.
■ Manual - Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.
This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Because training files are used in multiple
tutorials and are normally installed as read-only, you need to copy the three training files to a different
directory and make them writable. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer, you can do
so. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site, c_Townhouse,
c_Condo_Complex. Otherwise, use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.
Save training files to different folder

1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.
2 On the File menu, click Open.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Site.rvt.
NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.
4 On the File menu, click Save As, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step,
and save the file there.
5 On the File menu, click Close.
6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files:
■ c_Townhouse
■ c_Condo_Complex
7 Open the Model Linking folder, select the three files, right-click, and click Properties.
8 Clear Read-only, and click OK.
All three files now reside, with write permission, in the Model Linking folder that you created.
Link condo complex into site project
9 On the File menu, click Open.

■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.
■ Select c_Site.
■ Click Open.
Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 615

NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Because model
linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units, you do not need to change the
project units to metric. If you wish to do so, you can go to the Settings menu, click Project Units, and
make your changes.
10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model
sites.
11 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.
13 Click Open.

The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.
Move the condo complex building model
14 Select the linked building model.

After you select it, Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.rvt displays in the Type Selector.
Standard move commands work with linked building models. The linked model moves as one
object, similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.
15 On the Edit toolbar, click (Move).

The Move command requires two clicks. The first click specifies the move start point. The second
click specifies the move endpoint.
16 For the move start point, click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.
17 For the move endpoint, click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.

After you specify the location to move to, the linked file displays within the confines of the
blue detail lines.
18 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

Link the townhouse building model

■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder, and select c_Townhouse.
21 Click Open.

The townhouse building model displays above the site model.
Rotate the townhouse
22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.
23 On the Edit toolbar, click (Rotate).

To rotate an object, you first specify the rotation start point, and then click to specify the end
of the rotation. In this case, the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.
24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and, when the vertical line displays, click to specify
the rotation start point.
25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise, and click to specify the end of the rotation.

The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.
Move the townhouse
26 On the Edit toolbar, click (Move).

This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left
corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint
of the townhouse.
27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.
28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.

The townhouse is located within its required footprint.
Copy the townhouse
29 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).

The Copy command works much like the Move command. The first click specifies the start
point, and the second click specifies the copy-to point.
30 For the starting point, select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.
31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.

A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project.
32 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.
NOTE After you rotate the townhouse, if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines, use
the Move command to make any adjustments.
33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.

35 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity data, for Name, enter Townhouse A, and click
OK.
36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.
37 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View).

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and
in this view.
In this exercise, you linked two separate Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. After linking
the files, you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the
site development.
In the next exercise, you modify the elevation of the townhouses.
Repositioning Linked Building Models

In this exercise, you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. When you originally linked
the files, they were placed too low within the site topography. In this exercise, you modify their vertical
position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
Modify the vertical position of the townhouses
1 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels).

2 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the
following illustration.
NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels, click Try Me for the Full Nav Large
Wheel.
Repositioning Linked Building Models | 623

Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface.
This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top
of the site surface.
3 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left.

5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that, when it highlights, the status bar displays
the name of the linked file.
6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the
townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project.
In the steps that follow, you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this
project. When using the Align command, you first select the plane you want to align to, and
then select the plane that you want to align. In this case, you align the Ground Floor level to
Level 1 of the site plan.
7 On the Tools toolbar, click (Align).

8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project, move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the
Townhouse project, and click to select it.
TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project, press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays
in the status bar, and click to select the line. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level
marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. If you experience difficulty
finding the Level1 : Reference, you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. To do this,
click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Click the Revit Links tab, clear Visibility for the
c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click OK. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you
have completed this task.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option
displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would
over-constrain the model.
9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.

10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the
remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.
11 Return to the South elevation view.

Both townhouses should be at the proper level.
12 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View).
13 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the
following illustration.
Repositioning Linked Building Models | 625

in this view.
In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see,
each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those
differences within the host project.
In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.
Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility

In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a
Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility
settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
Modify visibility settings

1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South.
3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab.
4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a
linked file.
NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches
the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to
the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a
linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host
view for all options.
5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View.

6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom.
If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog
may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom.
7 Click the Annotations Categories tab.

8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>.
9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels.
10 Click OK.
11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK.
Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.
NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the
remaining elevation views.

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for
c_Condo_Complex.rvt.
Apply halftone

16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model.
17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK.

Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply
halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom
option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display
in halftone.
Detail levels of a linked file

20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View.
21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom.
22 Click the Model Categories tab.
23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>.
By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means
that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project
view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level
for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail
Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine.
In this case, no detail level changes are required.
24 Click OK.
Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 627

Modify display settings of linked files
You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link.
25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.
26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link.

27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view.
By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define
its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site
for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model
plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same
view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file.
28 Select By linked view for View range.

Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies
New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter.
This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed,
with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new,
existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction)
are displayed. All other components are grayed out.
29 Click OK.
30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK.
in this view.
In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the
level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it
would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model.
In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.
Managing Linked Building Models

In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects.
After you link a Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked
project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications
are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
Unload and reload links

1 On the File menu, click Manage Links.
2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab.
Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply
information regarding the links.
NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared
coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked
file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use
the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about
this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.
3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.
The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an
absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new
directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked
file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link
in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked
file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.
4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active.
5 Click Unload.
NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components
that must be opened and drawn.
6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.

The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear.
7 Click OK.
Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.
Managing Linked Building Models | 629

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a
different location.
Linking building models with Worksharing enabled

In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases,
you should consider the following:
■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can
specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click
the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing
the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.
■ Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked
files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files.
To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then
specify the additional worksets you need opened.
■ Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled
building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in
each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status
for all other linked files.
■ Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you
must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link
symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and
the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned
to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same
workset.
TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded
when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to
opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload.
NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed
by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser.
Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name
the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it
is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects.
In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the
next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects.
If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.
Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models

In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate
building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep
track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside.
When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by
the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point.
TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG,
project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog.
This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 614, and the resulting
project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.
Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates

In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked
to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components.
When you link a Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can
choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host
project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host
Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 631

project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect
to the site data.
When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends
the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host
project.
You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the
coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that
has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 614, and the
resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project,
open it before continuing.
Training File
■ On the File menu, click Open.
■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
■ Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.
Publish coordinates
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.
2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates.

As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to.
3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of
the host project.

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK.
On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting
for you to select another link.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and
in this view.
You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a
coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.
Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates

When a Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location.
Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host
project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes
saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of
the Host.
Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional
locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed
on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply
a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked
file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a
site.
In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from
one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing.
Specify a townhouse location

1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and,
when the edges highlight, click to select it.
Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 633

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value
is Not Shared.
4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the
linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you
need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation.
5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:

■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system.
■ Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.
6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename.

7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK.
8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK.
9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK.
Constrain a link to a specific location
11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project.
After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can
affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link
to a location, you have only two choices:
■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use.
■ Record the current position as a location.

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish
coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is
only necessary to reconcile coordinates once.
14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to.

Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an
instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left
townhouse resides at that location.
15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as.
Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine
its location.
16 Click Change.
17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK.
19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK.
You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.
Save locations
21 On the File menu, click Manage Links.

22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.
23 Click Save Locations.
24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly
save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there.
NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you
are prompted to save the locations to the linked files.
25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project
is no longer selected.
26 Click OK.
27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When
you release the mouse button, a warning displays.
You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific
location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel
the action.
28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B.

You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it.
When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that
the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared
coordinates.
Relocate a project
29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.
This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies
the move endpoint.
31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.
Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 635

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.
Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked
projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.
33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position.
35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one
of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure.
In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to
relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information
about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined
locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the
same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position.
In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Training File
■ Select c_Townhouse and click Open.
Link a project
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within
that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file.

■ Select c_Condo_Complex.
■ For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates.
■ Click Open.
Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the
host project.
4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.
The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building
model. The current active location is Lot A.
Working with a Linked Building Model | 637

Change the active location
5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations.

Notice that Lot A is the current active location.
6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current.

7 Click OK.
Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on
Lot B.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and
in this view.
In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file
into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.
In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.
Managing Shared Locations

The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename
existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new
location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool.
files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Manage locations
1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations.
2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate.
3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK.
Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file,
you can select Lot C if necessary.
Orient a view to true north
5 On the View menu, click View Properties.

6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click
OK.

7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.
Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.
Report shared coordinates
8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates.

This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with
respect to the shared coordinate origin.
9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area.

On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to
the origin.
10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish.
In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view
to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.
Scheduling Components of Linked Files

In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.
files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing.
Training File
■ Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.
Create a door schedule

1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.
Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 639

3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK.
Select the fields to display in the door schedule

5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add.
6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ Family and Type
■ Comments
■ Cost
7 Select Include elements in linked files.

8 Click OK.
In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project, you can sort the schedule
data and display a single table entry per door type.
Sort schedule data
9 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, right-click Door Schedule, and click
Properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.
11 In the Schedule Properties dialog, select Family and Type for Sort by.
12 Select Grand totals, clear Itemize every instance, and then click OK twice.
Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type, the schedule lists the total count
for each door type, and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.

In this exercise, you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You also
sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.
You have completed this tutorial.
Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 641

642
Project Phasing
21
In any project, you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Phases represent distinct time periods
over the duration of a project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific
phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. This allows
you to create phase-specific project documentation, complete with schedules. For the client, you can create a visual time
line of phase-specific 3D views.
In this tutorial, you work with a building information model that requires renovation. You create new phases, assign new
building model elements such as steelwork (columns, beams, braces and footings) to phases, and create plan views for
each phase. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. You then create schedules for the
phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific
phase.
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new
phases, demolish existing construction, and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise, you apply
phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.
Using Phasing
In this lesson, you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. You create and manage 3 project
phases, assigning building elements to the appropriate phase:
■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal
partitions.
■ Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building, as well as a covered
walkway, the galleria. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building.
■ Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork, footings, a floor slab, and a non load-bearing brick panel wall
for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria.
643
Existing phase
Phase 1 (south)
644 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing

Phase 2 (north)
After you add phases to the project, you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. You
create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model.
The finished sheet
Phasing Your Model

In this exercise, you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. The default structural
project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. You create new phases for the project timeline,
use phase filters to control what displays in each phase, and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition
work. After you assign building elements to phases, you create new phase-specific views.
Dataset
Phasing Your Model | 645

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing.rvt.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing
on the goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, click
Settings menu ➤ Project Units, define metric units, and click OK.
Verify the current phase is New Construction

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Floor.
When you create a new structural project, 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New
Construction. As you add new elements to the building model, they are assigned to the New
Construction phase by default. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within
the view properties. For example, if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting, then new building
elements are assigned to Phase 1. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase
Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work.
TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are
available for each new project. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time.

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter
and New Construction is selected for Phase.
Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value.
The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new, existing, demo, or temporary)
are visible in this phase. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from
previous phases in the project timeline. By default, the current phase linework is displayed as
black, while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. Demolition work is represented by a
black dashed line.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Select any of the exterior walls.

In the Element Properties dialog, notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction, and
the Phase Demolished value is None. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases
in a timeline. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition.
7 Click Cancel.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify to clear the command.
Add and edit phases
9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.

10 In the Phasing dialog, on the Project Phases tab, click the New Construction field.
11 Enter Phase 1 (south).
All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south)
because you changed the phase name.
12 Under Insert, click After, and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name.
The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list, so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur
after the Existing phase.
13 Click in the Description fields for each phase, and enter the following text:
■ Existing: Existing building
■ Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls
■ Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall
14 Click OK.
There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing, Phase 1 (south), and Phase 2 (north). All of
the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south).
Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase

17 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the
Phasing heading.
The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All, which means that work
assigned to Phase 1 (south), existing earlier phases, demo, or temporary work (created and
demolished in same phase), is visible in this view.
18 Select Show New for Phase Filter, and click OK.

Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. You do not see a
change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). With the
phase Filter set to Show New, as you change selected building elements to the existing phase,
you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the
view.

19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown.
20 In the drawing area, right-click one of the rectangular footings, and click Select All Instances.
21 On the View Control Bar, click Hide/Isolate, and click Hide Object.
The footings are hidden and cannot be selected.
22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.

23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building, as shown.

25 In the Filter dialog, clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing, and click OK.
This filters out the steelwork, and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they
couldn’t be selected. The continuous footing foundations, walls, and openings, which are the
building elements that comprise the existing building, are selected and are displayed in red.

27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK.
28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast.
29 On the View Control Bar, click Hide/Isolate, and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the
drawing. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed.

31 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Show All for Phase Filter.
32 Click OK.

Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. All of the structural
elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south).
33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.

34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements, the walls, the slab, and the footings
north of the galleria.

36 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created, and
click OK.
37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.
Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All, the building
is displayed as shown. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. You do not see
future phases such as Phase 2 (north).
You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. Because this is a renovation project, it
requires separate plan views for the Existing, Phase 1 (south) with demolition, and Phase 2
(north) project phases. After you create the views, you modify phase and phase filter properties

to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing, new, demo, and
temporary) are shown in the same timeline. In a phase such as Phase 1, it might be desirable to
show previous phases or demolition.
Create phase-specific plan views
38 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Floor, and click Rename.
39 In the Rename View dialog, enter Existing, and click OK.
You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. This refers to the ceiling
plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Because this is a phase-specific view,
you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level.
40 Click No.
41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Existing, and click Duplicate.
42 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Existing, and click Rename.
43 In the Rename View dialog, enter Phase 1 (south), and click OK.
You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1, which will
include planned demolition.
44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north)

Manage the phases for a view
45 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Existing.

47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase, and click OK.
The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black.
48 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double click Phase 1 (south).
50 In the View Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value, and
click OK.
The line style of the new work, in phase 1, shows as black. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing
construction, Because of this time relationship, a graphic override is used to make “older” existing
elements use the gray line style. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter
is set to Show All.
Demolish the interior walls

The cursor is displayed as a hammer.

52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration, select the interior
walls one at a time.
As you click each wall, it is displayed as a dashed line.

Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish
them. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host, you
demolish all elements hosted by it. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are
demolished in this phase.
53 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Phase 2 (north).

55 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value, and
select Show All for Phase Filter.
56 Click OK.
The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as
gray.
Create a custom phase filter
57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.

58 In the Phasing dialog, click the Phase Filters tab.
The default phase filters are displayed. In this case, however, you need a filter that takes all of
the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in
red.
59 In the Phasing dialog, click New.

A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.
60 Under Filter Name, click Filter 1, and enter Demo Red.

61 For the Filter Name, Demo Red, under Demolished, select Overridden.
This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements, New,
Existing, Demolished, and Temporary.
View graphic overrides
62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab.

Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase
status: existing, demo, new or temporary.
63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red.
64 Click OK twice.

Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view
65 Under Floor Plans, double-click Phase 1 (south).

Because you changed the override, and the Show All phase filter includes the override for
demolition, the demolished walls are displayed as red.
66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view, click View menu ➤ View Properties.
67 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work
that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides.
The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same.
68 Click OK.
Create phase-specific 3D views
69 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D and click Duplicate. Do this 3 times so
you have 3 copies.
70 Right-click on each of the copies, and click Rename.
71 Name the views Existing, Phase 1 (south), Phase 2 (north).
Manage the phases for the 3D views
72 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Existing.

74 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for the Phase value, and click
OK.
The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black.

76 Under Graphics, select Shading for Model Graphics Style.
77 Select Coordination for Discipline, which will show both architectural and structural building
elements.
78 Click OK.
79 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Phase 1 (south).
81 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Phase 1 (south) for Phase, and Show All
for Phase Filter.
The line style of the new work, in phase 1, shows as black. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing
construction. Because of this time relationship, a graphic override is used to make “older” existing
elements use the gray line style. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter
is set to Show All.
82 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Shading for Model Graphics Style.
83 Select Coordination for Discipline.
This displays both architectural and structural building elements.

84 Click OK.
85 Repeat steps 81 - 84 for the Phase 2 (north) view, assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase.
86 If you wish to save this file, you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the
next exercise.
In this exercise, you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate
phase filters to display each phase. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition
work in red. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation.
Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules

In this exercise, you create column, framing, and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. You create
a new sheet on which you place the schedules, as well as 2 views of the building model.
The finished sheet

Dataset
Metric\m_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules.
Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south)

1 On the View tab of the Design bar, click Schedule/Quantities.
2 In the New Schedule dialog, do the following:
■ Under Category, select Structural Columns.
■ Enter Columns - Phase 1 for Name.
■ Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase.
■ Click OK.

4 Under Available Fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule
in order:
■ Count
■ Family and Type
■ Length
TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields.
5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and do the following:

■ Select Family and Type for Sort By.
■ Select Length for Then by.
■ Select Grand totals.
■ Clear Itemize every instance.
■ Click OK.
You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column.
Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south)
6 On the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

■ Under Category, select Structural Framing.
■ Enter Framing - Phase 1 for Name.
■ Click OK.
Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 655

in order:
■ Count
■ Family and Type

■ Click OK.
Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south)
11 On the Design bar, click Schedule/Quantities

■ Under Category, select Structural Foundations.
■ Enter Footings - Phase 1 for Name.
■ Click OK.

in order:
■ Count
■ Family and Type

■ Click OK.
Create a sheet and then add views and schedules
16 In the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (all), and click New Sheet.
17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK.
18 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), right-click the new sheet, and click Rename.
19 In the Sheet Title dialog, enter Phase 1 - Structural for Name.
Next, you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. Use the following illustration as
a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet, and click
to place it.
21 Under 3D views, drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet, and click to place it.
22 Expand Schedules, drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet, and click to place them.
23 On the sheet, select each schedule one at a time, and move the column controls to adjust column
width.
In this exercise, you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on
a sheet.
Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 657

658
Rendering Views and
Creating Walkthroughs 22
In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and
exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a
model.
Rendering an Exterior View

In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and
create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house
659
Nighttime rendering of the pool house
You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the
perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that
define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.
Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model

In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in
a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You
work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.
In this exercise, you:
■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house.
■ change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete.
■ define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool
house wall.
When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the
pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.
660 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.
View the finish material of the screen wall

1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.
2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.
Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 661

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click (Element
Properties).
You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall,
so you can change the render appearance for the material.

5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit.
6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid.
7 Click OK 3 times.
Change the render appearance of the wood material

The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of
a dark stained, satin-finished teak.
9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid.

10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and
click OK.
You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You
make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish.
12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish.
13 Click Update Preview, and click OK.
The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can
be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results.
Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete
14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).
The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default
material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit.
17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click
.
18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview.
20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns.

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions
23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house
wall.
25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum.

You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material.
26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black,
and click OK.
28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading.
By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color
defined by the render appearance.
29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK.
31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern),
and click OK.

The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used
by the curtain wall mullion category.
33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click .
34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black.
35 Click OK twice.
36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.
Render a region of the model to view the material changes
37 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.
39 Select the rendering crop boundary.

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the
materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad).
NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise
render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.
41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:
■ Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium.
Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process
will take. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality
and output settings.
■ Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only.
■ For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.
43 Click Render.
The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of
the rendering process.
44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog,
under Display, click Show the model.
46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 667.
Adding Trees to the Site

In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context
for rendering the project.
Adding Trees to the Site | 667

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering.
NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are
referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
Add shrubs and trees to the site

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.
2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component.
TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site.
4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''.
NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library.
See Loading Families in the Autodesk Revit Structure 2009 Online Help.
5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not
important.)
6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the
project, similar to the locations shown.
Adding Trees to the Site | 669

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left
of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.
Create a tree type and add it to the site
8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar,
click (Element Properties).

You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family.
10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename.

11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK.
12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'.
13 Click OK twice.
14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.


17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View on page 671.
Creating a Perspective View

In this exercise, you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.
Creating a Perspective View | 671

Training File
Place a camera in the site view

1 With the Site view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target
point:
■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the
camera.
■ Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point
of the camera.
Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.
The perspective view displays.

3 Zoom out, and select the crop boundary.
4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground,
as shown.
Depending on camera placement, the back wall of the yard may be cut off.
Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane
5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site, and adjust the field of vision, as
necessary.
If the camera is not shown in the view, in the Project Browser, right-click 3D View 1, and click
Show Camera. With the camera shown, the triangle that represents the field of vision can be
adjusted. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera
can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.
Creating a Perspective View | 673

6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior - Day, and click OK.
8 In the Project Browser, double-click Exterior - Day to open the view, and make any final
adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.
9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.
10 Save the file.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 675.

Creating the Exterior Rendering
In this exercise, you specify the time and location settings for the rendering, and render a daytime view of
the exterior.
You then duplicate the view, modify render settings, and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the
exterior.
Training File
Display the perspective view

1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Exterior - Day.
Creating the Exterior Rendering | 675

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view

You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun
relates to the location settings, see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies.
3 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Sun, select Edit/New.

4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Spring Equinox, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm.
6 Click OK twice.
7 In the Rendering dialog, under Background, select Sky: Cloudy.
You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case, the sky will be a procedural sky based on
cloud settings and time of day.
NOTE If a background image is required, export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. The PNG
and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during
photoediting.
8 Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium, and click Render.

9 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model.
After the image is rendered, you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as
long as the Revit Structure session is open.
10 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the rendering.

Export the rendered image to an external file
11 In the Rendering dialog, click Export.

12 In the Save Image dialog:
■ In the left pane, click Desktop.
■ For Files of type, select Portable Network Graphics (*.png).
■ Click Save.
The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.
Creating the Exterior Rendering | 677

Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Exterior - Day, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
To create a similar view using different rendering settings, you duplicate the view and change
the settings.
15 Rename the Copy of Exterior - Day view to Exterior - Night.
16 With the Exterior - Night view open, on the View Control Bar, click (Show Rendering
Dialog).
17 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Artificial only, and click
Artificial Lights.
You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.
Create lighting groups
18 In the Artificial Lights - Exterior - Night, dialog, under Group Options, click New.
Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.
19 In the New Light Group dialog, for Name, enter Pool Lights, and click OK.
20 In the Artificial Lights dialog, under Ungrouped Lights, highlight 9 :Sconce Light - Flat Round
: 60W - 120V through 14 :Sconce Light - Flat Round : 60W - 120V, and click Move to Group.
To select a sequential list, select the first light, press and hold SHIFT, and select the last light.
21 In the Light Groups dialog, verify that Pool Lights is selected, and click OK.
22 Using the same method, add 30 :Sconce Light - Flat Round : 60W - 120V through 35 :Sconce
Light - Flat Round : 60W - 120V to the Pool Lights group.
23 In the Artificial Lights dialog, under Group Options, click New.
24 In the New Light Group dialog, for Name, enter Pool House Lights, and click OK.
25 Using the same method, under Ungrouped Lights, add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture
to the Pool House Lights group.
26 In the Artificial Lights dialog, click OK.
27 In the Rendering dialog, click Render.

Adjust the exposure
28 In the Rendering dialog, under Image, click Adjust Exposure.

After the image is rendered, the exposure can be modified to improve the output. In this example,
you change the brightness of the exposure, but the other settings can be modified as well to
control the final rendering. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure
session.
29 In the Exposure Control dialog, for Exposure Value, enter 4, and click OK.
30 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model, and then switch between the views by clicking
Show the rendering.
32 Save the file.
33 Proceed to the next lesson, Rendering an Interior View on page 679.
Rendering an Interior View

In this lesson, you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model
that you worked with in the previous lesson.
Rendering an Interior View | 679

Draft nighttime rendering of the interior
High quality daytime rendering of the interior
To create the rendered view, you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house,
define the perspective view and rendering settings, and finally, render the views.
Adding RPC People

In this exercise, you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. RPC people
are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.
Training File

Add an RPC figure to the view
2 Zoom in to the pool house.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Component.

4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Female : YinYin, and place the component inside the pool
house.
Exact placement is not important, but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that
her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.
6 Select the figure, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Rotate).

7 Rotate the figure:
The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure, the person’s line of sight.
■ Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight.
Adding RPC People | 681

■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees, and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity.
Enable reflective properties for RPC content
8 With the RPC figure selected, on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).
In order to see the figure’s reflection, the reflective properties must be turned on for the family
type. By default, the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering
performance. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering, you can enable this
option.

10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Render Appearance Properties, click Edit.
11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog, under Parameters, select Cast Reflections.
14 Save the file.

15 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 683.
Creating the Interior Perspective View

In this exercise, you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this
lesson. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera, and using a section box to limit the geometry
included in the rendering process.
Training File
Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Exact placement is not
important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:
■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.
■ Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.
Creating the Interior Perspective View | 683

The perspective view displays.
Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view
3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

4 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Properties.
You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
In order to accurately adjust the section box, you display an elevation/section view and a plan
view, in addition to the 3D view.

9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevations), double-click South.
11 In the 3D view, select the section box.
Creating the Interior Perspective View | 685

12 In the floor plan view, size the box as shown.
13 In the South Elevation view, size the box as shown.
14 In the 3D view, select the section box, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

15 Maximize the 3D view, and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration.
16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

17 Save the file.
18 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Interior Rendering on page 687.
Creating the Interior Rendering

In this exercise, you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime
view, you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall, and render the interior view.
Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows, doors that contain windows or
glass, and curtain walls.
Training File
Creating the Interior Rendering | 687

Define lighting for a nighttime view

1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
2 In the Rename View dialog, enter Interior - Night, and click OK.

4 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Scheme, select Interior: Artificial only.
The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an
interior rendering without daylight. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete
using the Adjust Exposure option.
5 Click Artificial Lights.

6 In the Artificial Lights dialog, clear Pool Lights, and click OK.
Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering, you turn them off for
this scene. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions
for views.
7 Under Quality, for Setting, select Draft.

You can specify a lower quality, and render the view to check lighting levels and material
selections. After these settings are established, the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.
8 In the Rendering dialog, click Render.

Create an interior day view
10 In the Project Browser, right-click Interior - Night, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
You create a view for the interior during the day. You can duplicate the view for each lighting
condition/time of day you want to render.
11 Rename the copied view to Interior - Day.

Specify rendering settings

13 In the Rendering dialog, for Scheme, select Interior: Sun only.
14 For Setting, select Edit.
15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog, click Copy To Custom.
The preset schemes are read-only. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in
order to make changes. In this case, in order to turn on daylight portals, you must create a
custom setting.
NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. This process must be repeated if you want to
use custom settings in other views.
16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog; for Daylight Portal Options, select Curtain Walls, and click
OK.
For sunlit interiors, the daylight portals can be turned on. By default they are turned off, but
the space will receive standard daylighting. The daylight portals help to further refine this
daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. For more information on daylight portals, see the
Revit Structure Online Help.
IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times.
17 In the Rendering dialog, for Sun, select Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm, select Region, and
click Render.

18 In the Rendering dialog, under Image, click Adjust Exposure.
19 In the Exposure Control dialog:
■ For Exposure Value, enter 10.
■ For Saturation, enter 1.
■ Click OK.
Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.
In the next steps, you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.
20 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model, and close the Rendering dialog.
Modify the column material
21 In the drawing area, select the column on the right, and on the Options Bar, click (Element
Properties).
View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood.

23 With the column still selected, click Settings menu ➤ Materials.
24 In the Materials dialog, select Wood.
25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab:
■ For Finish, select Unfinished.
■ For Bump, select Based on wood grain.
■ For Amount, move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5.6.
■ For Rotate, enter 90.
You change the varnish setting, add a bump map to create texture, and rotate the material so
that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.
26 Click Update Preview, and click OK.

Create a print quality rendering

After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material
selection, you can define the output and quality settings for final output. The rendered output
can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image
can be controlled. As size and DPI are increased, the render time increases significantly.
28 In the Rendering dialog, clear Region.

29 In the Rendering dialog, under Output Settings, for Resolution, select Printer.
30 In the drawing area, select the crop boundary, and on the Options Bar, click the dimensions for
Size.
31 In the Crop Region Size dialog:
■ Under Change, select Scale (locked proportions).
■ For Width, enter 5''.
■ Click OK.
32 In the Rendering dialog, for Setting, select High, and click Render.

The rendered image displays. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project.
33 Close the exercise file with or without saving.

By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial, you rendered an exterior and an interior
view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in
order to optimize the final output.
Creating and Recording Walkthroughs

In this lesson, you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in
Autodesk Revit Structure 2009. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default, but you can
also create it in a 3D orthographic view.
Creating and Editing a Walkthrough
The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path, which is the path that a camera
will follow through the building model. Usually, you define the walkthrough path in a plan view, but you
can also define it in a 3D, elevation, or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline, and you create it by
specifying points that create the spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Additional
frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough
path by selecting and moving the key frames. In a plan view, you can also specify the height of the camera
along the walkthrough path.
Recording a Walkthrough
After you create a walkthrough, you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any
available video player, independent of the Revit Structure software. When you export your walkthrough to
an AVI, you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:
■ Wireframe
■ Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines)
■ Shading

■ Shading with Edges
■ Rendering
Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.
You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining
room, and ends in the far corner of the living room.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt.
NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values, click
Settings ➤ Project Units, and change unit formats as desired.
Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 1st Floor.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Walkthrough.
TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and
click the tab in the context menu.
3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view, on the Options Bar, verify that Perspective
is selected.
4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room, and click to specify the start point
(the first key frame) of the walkthrough.
5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown.
Creating a Walkthrough | 693

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options
Bar, click Finish.
Edit and play the walkthrough
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs, and double-click Walkthrough 1.
The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed, surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as
shown. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the
walkthrough path is not precisely the same.

8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with
blue grips. If it is not, select the crop boundary.
Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.
9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region, on the Options Bar, click the
dimensions for Size.
10 In the Crop Region Size dialog, for Width, enter 16'', and for Height, enter 9''.
11 Under Change, verify that Field of view is selected, and click OK.
12 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.
13 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough.

The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame
300 of a total of 300 frames.
14 Click .
15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog, enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the
walkthrough from 300 to 60, and click OK.
16 On the Options Bar, for Frame, enter 1, and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from
the beginning (the key frame).
17 Click .
Creating a Walkthrough | 695

The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.
NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time, press ESC.
18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, Changing the Walkthrough
Path and Camera Position on page 696.
Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position

In this exercise, you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the
walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Townhouse.rvt.
Change the properties of the camera

1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor.
2 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Far Clip Active, and click OK.
Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.
Edit the walkthrough path
4 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough.

The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast
room.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as
shown.
Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration, so do not be concerned if the
camera displays at a slightly different location.
6 On the Options Bar, for Controls, select Path.

Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position.
7 Click the third key frame position, and drag it to the location shown.
Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 697

Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made
8 In the Project Browser, under Walkthroughs, double-click Walkthrough 1.
9 To play the walkthrough, on the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough, and then click .
10 Proceed to the next exercise, Recording the Walkthrough on page 698.
Recording the Walkthrough

In this exercise, you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an
AVI file. When you export the walkthrough, you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe, hidden
line, shading, shading with edges, or rendering.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Townhouse.rvt.
1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough.

2 In the Length/Format dialog, under Output Length, for Frames/sec, enter 15.
3 Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, select <Shading>, and click OK.
4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog, specify a path and a file name for the AVI, and click Save.
5 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, select any codec (compression/decompression)
that is available on your system, and click OK.
NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are
unsure of what option to use, the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. It
produces files that are larger than compressed files, but that do not suffer loss due to compression
quality.
The walkthrough is recorded.
6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously,
without opening Autodesk Revit Structure 2009.
7 Try creating other walkthroughs, specifying the number of frames, reducing the size of the
image, perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height, and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.
If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds, then you are moving from the breakfast
area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Reducing the size of the output images and
managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement.
8 If you want to save this exercise, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a
unique name.
9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Roofs
23
In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Structure 2009. In addition, you learn
how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.
Creating Roofs
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, mansard, and
low sloped roofs. In this lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.
Creating an Extruded Roof

In this exercise, you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.
You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway.
Before you can sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do
not need to create the work plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Roofs.rvt.
699
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.
3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to
select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.
6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK.
The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.
Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help
determine key points on the profile sketch.
7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.
TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially, you can place it in the
general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane
is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the
temporary dimension is measured from (face, centerline, and so on), click the blue square on the
witness line.
700 | Chapter 23 Roofs

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.
10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.
11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.
Creating an Extruded Roof | 701

Next, sketch the roof profile.
12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.

13 On the Options Bar, select Chain.
14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.
Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.
Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.
The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.
16 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.
Next, use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to
the exterior walls.
17 On the Tools toolbar, click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

18 Select the edge of the roof, and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof
to the garage wall.
Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior
wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

20 Select the breezeway roof edge, press TAB, and then select the exterior face of the wall.
The roof should resemble the following illustration.
The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof, so you next attach the breezeway walls to the
breezeway roof.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Type 1), and double-click Section
1.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 Select one of the breezeway walls, press CTRL, and select the second wall.
Creating an Extruded Roof | 703

24 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.
26 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the
model.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 704.
Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint

In this exercise, you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope
lines to define the roof gable ends.
To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch, you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope
lines.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level, and click Yes.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
Next, sketch the roof footprint.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.

5 On the Options Bar, verify that Defines slope is selected, and enter 600 for Overhang.
6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed
blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 705

7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed
blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
8 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope.

9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint.
Next, edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.
10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
11 Press CTRL, select both slope definition lines, and on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default, the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a
1000 mm run.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the
roof slope, and click OK.
13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
14 When you see the informational dialog, click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls
to the roof.
15 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in
the model.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on
page 707.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint
In this exercise, you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. The roof requires an opening to
accommodate a chimney.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define
the roof slope lines and complete the footprint, you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.
When you complete the roof, the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.
Training File
3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.

5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls, press TAB, and then verify that a dashed blue line
displays to the exterior side of the walls.
Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 707

6 Click to select all the walls.
Next, sketch the chimney opening.

9 Using automatic snaps, sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney
face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.
10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.
Next, add new slope lines to the roof.

12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.
15 On the Options bar, select Defines Slope.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
17 When you see the informational dialog, click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.

18 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 709.
Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint

In this exercise, you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.
Training File
3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 709

5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that
a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select
the walls.
Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the
roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.
7 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and click (Pick Lines).
8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building, using the following
illustration for guidance.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must
trim these lines to create a valid sketch.
9 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend).

10 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
11 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical slope definition line, and then specify a
point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.
Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.

12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
Next, raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.
13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Properties.

The Element Properties dialog is displayed.
14 Under Constraints, enter 600 for Base Offset From Level, and click OK.
17 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the
house. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels.)
Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the
walls to the roof.

19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof, click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar, and
then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.
Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 711

21 Click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support
the hip roof.
22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press
and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.
Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join
Roof command to fix the roof.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof, and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.
The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 713.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint
In this exercise, you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.
Training File
4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 300 for Overhang.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then
click to select all three of the entry way walls.
Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to
select the walls.
6 On the Options Bar, enter 0 for Overhang.

7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must
trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

9 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
10 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical roof line, and then select a point near the
midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment
on the side that you want to keep.
Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 713

11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
Next, you add a slope-defining line.
12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the lower horizontal line at the
front of the roof.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.
14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Properties.

16 Under Constraints, enter -600 for Base Offset From Level, and click OK.
17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof to complete the roof.
18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.
20 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 714.
Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof

In this exercise, you add slope arrows to the shed roof.
Training File
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.

2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.
Before you can add slope arrows, you need to split the slope defining line into three segments.
To help locate the position of each split, you need to add two reference planes.
6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
7 On the Options Bar, click (Pick Lines), and enter 600 for Offset.
8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed
roof sketch.
9 On the Tools menu, click Split Walls and Lines.

10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following
illustration.
Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines
slope.
11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope.
Next, add two new slope arrows.
13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Slope Arrow.
14 On the Options Bar, verify (Draw) is selected.

15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line:
■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the
location of the slope arrow tail.
Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 715

■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify
the location of the slope arrow head.
16 Repeat steps 13 - 15 to add the second slope arrow.

Begin the tail at the right reference plane, and move the cursor to place the arrow. The head
should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.
18 Press CTRL, select both slope arrows, and click (Properties).

19 Under Constraints, select Slope for Specify.
20 Under Dimensions, enter 500 for Rise/1000, and then click OK.
21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof to complete the roof.
22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model.
NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall
to the roof.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, Aligning Roof Eaves on page 716.
Aligning Roof Eaves

In this exercise, you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to
adjust the eave heights. When you sketch a hip roof, the adjacent eave heights must align. When eave
heights differ, you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them.
Training File
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
2 Select the gable roof over the garage.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit.

4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
6 With the two gable end lines selected, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 800 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Align Eaves.
The eave lines display with a dimension. This dimension is the height of the eave measured
from the sketch plane.
9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves, you must select one
eave to use to align both eaves.
Next, select a method to align the eaves.
10 On the Options Bar, select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to
match the eave height of the first eave.
11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.
Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with
a unique name.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Mansard Roof on page 718.
Aligning Roof Eaves | 717

Creating a Mansard Roof
In this exercise, you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another
roof on top of it.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click North.
Notice the model has four defined levels:
In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.
3 Select the roof and, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.
5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.

Next, create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.
10 On the Options Bar, click (Pick Lines), and then select Defines slope.
11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.

13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines, press TAB, and select the remaining three lines.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 750 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
Creating a Mansard Roof | 719

17 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete
mansard roof.
a unique name.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 720.
Creating a Low Slope Roof

In this exercise, you add a roof to a building shell. After you add the roof, you modify the slab to represent
roof drains in the low slope roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent
the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.rvt.
NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.

Create a flat roof by footprint
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Roof.
2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
4 On the Options Bar, verify that Defines slope is not selected, and that Overhang is 0' 0''.
5 In the drawing area, select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.
6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of
the arc wall at the entry.
Creating a Low Slope Roof | 721

Because the walls are not continuous, you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Instead
you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop
sketch.

8 Select the walls to create a closed loop, as shown:
9 On the Design Bar, click Roof Properties.

10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select Steel Truss - Insulation on Metal Deck - EPDM,
and click OK.

Open a section view
12 In the drawing area, double-click the section head to open the section view.
13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.

The roof has been created, but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. In
the next steps, you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.
Add split lines to segment the roof
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Roof.

15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof, and click to select it.

You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope
independently.

17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line.
18 Move the cursor down, and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line
You create a split line vertically down the center.
19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line, move the cursor horizontally to the left, and select a
point on the opposite roof line.
20 Using the same method, add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the
arc.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Next, you begin to shape the slab by adding points for
the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges.
Add elevation points
21 With the roof still selected, on the Options Bar, click (Add points).
22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section.
In this exercise, exact placement of the points is not important. Layout tools in Revit Structure
such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points
on a roof slab.

You modify the points individually. You could also select multiple points and change them all
at once from the Options Bar.

24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof, for the dimension, enter -2'', and press
ENTER.
The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane.
25 Using the same method, specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.
The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.
Edit the roof edges

27 Press and hold CTRL, and select all of the roof edges, including the interior edges of the roof
regions, as shown:
28 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter 4'', and press ENTER.
Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the
slab.
Modify the construction of the slab type
30 In the drawing area, double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape
editing.
31 Select the roof slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Properties).

The slab has not responded exactly as intended. The entire slab is sloped. In some cases this
type of slope is desired, but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. You
edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.

34 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Thermal/Air Layer, select Variable.
By making the insulation layer variable, the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer,
leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof.
36 View the results in the section view.
The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center.
a unique name.
39 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits on page 728.
Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits

In this lesson, you learn how to create roof fascia, gutters, and soffits in Revit Structure. After you create a
roof, you can easily create its fascia, gutters, and soffits.

Creating Roof Fascia
In this exercise, you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.
Training File
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Condominium.rvt.
1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs.
3 Press CTRL, select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.rfa, and click Open.
4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.
5 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).

6 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.
8 In the Name dialog, enter Built-up Fascia, and click OK.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38
x 286 for Profile, and click OK twice.
10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.
Creating Roof Fascia | 729

11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.
12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify to exit the Fascia command.

14 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Gutters on page 730.
Creating Gutters
In this exercise, you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a
condominium building model.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.
2 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).

3 In the Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name, and click OK.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for
Profile.
7 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value field for Material, and then click .
8 In the Materials dialog, select Metal-Aluminum for Name, and click OK three times.
9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.
10 Click to place the gutter.
11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Soffits on page 732.
Creating Gutters | 731

Creating Soffits
In this exercise, you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the
condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Roof.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Roofs.

4 Select the roof.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.
7 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry.

8 Select the roof, and then select the soffit to join them.
Creating Soffits | 733

a unique name.

Grouping
24
Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to
many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification
process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model
are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications.
You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then
you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically
included in the host group.
Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project,
or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also
gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because
existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office
can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups

In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of
repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units,
hotel rooms, and typical office layouts.
After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various
methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of
the group and saving the changes.
In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered
nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the
building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.
Creating and Placing a Group

In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group
by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity.
In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance
of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.
Training File
735
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.rvt.
NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.
Create a group for the typical kitchen layout

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.
2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor
plan.
736 | Chapter 24 Grouping

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.
4 On the Edit toolbar, click (Group).

5 In the Create Model Group dialog, enter Typical Kitchen, and click OK.
The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.
Creating and Placing a Group | 737

Change the origin point for the group
6 In the drawing area, select the center control for the group origin, and drag it to the upper-right
corner of the kitchen.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

Place instances of the group
9 In the Project Browser, under Groups, expand Model, right-click Typical Kitchen, and click
Create Instance.
10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan, and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place
the kitchen group.
11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.

13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

14 On the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).
15 On the Options Bar, clear Copy.
16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.
The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.
NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image, select the group and use
the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Rotate).
18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.
19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images, select the group and
use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the
original orientation, one mirrored, and one rotated, as shown.

Save the training file

23 Navigate to your preferred directory, name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt,
and click Save.
Modifying a Group
In this exercise, you make changes to an instance of a group. When you finish editing, all instances of the
same group in the drawing are updated.
Training File
Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise,
m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
Modify visibility of elements in a group

1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.
2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen, press TAB to highlight the wall, and
click to select it.
Modifying a Group | 743

3 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).
This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.
NOTE To display an excluded element, select the element, and click (Restore excluded group
member to group instance.).
4 Move the cursor over the door, press TAB, and click to select the door.

6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall, press TAB, and click to select the wall.


Add elements for a unique condition
9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.

10 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Generic - 127mm.
11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance, move the cursor to the
left, and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.

13 On the Design Bar, click Door.
14 In the Type Selector, select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm.
15 On the Options Bar, clear Tag on Placement.
16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.
Modifying a Group | 745

Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances
19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.

20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.
21 On the Options Bar, click Edit Group.
In edit group mode, the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow, and the group
editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. The elements in this instance of the
group remain displayed in their object style. All other elements in the model are grayed out.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.
23 In the drawing area, select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.
24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall, move the cursor up, and click near the top corner of
the wall to create an opening.

26 Select the opening, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).
27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Unconnected Height, enter 2134.
28 For Base Offset, enter 1000, and click OK.
29 On the group editor toolbar, click Finish.
All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change.
Nesting Groups
In this exercise, you add the Typical Kitchen group, created in an earlier lesson, and the wall and folding
doors for the closet, to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom
unit group, which acts as the host. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit, all instances of the
host group are updated to contain the nested group.
Nesting Groups | 747

Training File
Add elements to an existing group

1 If necessary, in the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click First Floor.
2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Group.
4 On the group editor toolbar, click (Add to Group).

5 In the drawing area, select the Typical Kitchen group.

6 Press TAB, select the wall between the folding doors, and each of the bifold doors.
7 On the group editor toolbar, click Finish.

8 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Second Floor.
9 Select the 2 bedroom group.
Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.
Nesting Groups | 749

Working with Detail Groups

In this lesson, you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across
projects. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements, such as text, and filled regions.
You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building
model.
Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific
model group, such as door and window tags. In the next exercise, you add door tags to a group, and create
an attached detail group containing the tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way
than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more
manual manipulation.
Creating a Detail Group

In this exercise, you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring
in front of the elevators in the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.
You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.
Training File
Draw a filled region

1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click First Floor.
2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
4 On the Options Bar, click to draw a rectangular region.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.
6 Move the cursor down and to the left, and select a point below the left elevator.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors.
Creating a Detail Group | 751

Add a text note
9 On the Options Bar, click to add an arc leader.

10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.
11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point.
12 Enter Tile, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.
The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.
Create a detail group
13 Press and hold CTRL, and select the text note and the filled region.

15 In the Create Detail Group dialog, enter Elevator Lobby Tile, and click OK.
16 In the drawing area, select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.
17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft, as shown.

Add a group instance to a different view

20 In the Project Browser, under Groups, expand Detail, right-click Elevator Lobby Tile, and click
Create Instance.
21 In the drawing area, click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify

Using Attached Detail Groups

In this exercise, you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group, and then use the door tags to create an
attached detail group. Because the detail group contains variables, it cannot be added to a group in the same
Using Attached Detail Groups | 753

manner that a drawing component can be added; you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2
Bedroom Unit group.
Training File
Place door tags

1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click First Floor.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit, as shown.
NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.

Create an attached detail group
6 In the drawing area, draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the
right area of the floor plan including the door tags.

7 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).
8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Door Tags, and click OK.

10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog, for Attached Detail Group Name,
enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags, and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit, and view that Floor Plan: 2
Bedroom Door Tags is attached.
Place a detail group in another group instance
Using Attached Detail Groups | 755

13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit.
14 On the Options Bar, click Place Detail.
15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog, select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags, and
click OK.
Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.
NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential; therefore, the doors are numbered based upon
the order in which you placed each group.
Saving and Loading Groups

In this lesson, you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team
members for use in other projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project, you can
then work with it in the context of the new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to
replace the group with an alternative unit layout.
Saving and Loading Groups

In this exercise, you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. This enables
you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.
Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar
typical layouts for repetitive units.
Training File

Save a group to a library

1 In the Project Browser, under Groups\Model, right-click 2 Bedroom Unit, and click Save Group.
2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog, click Desktop.
3 For File name, verify that Same as group name is selected, and click Save.
You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project, or a Revit family
file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. In this case, the file is saved as a Revit project
file (RVT).
Load the group in a new project

5 In the New Project dialog, accept the default template file, for Create new, verify that Project is
selected, and click OK.
6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.
7 In the Load File as Group dialog, browse to the Desktop, select 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt, and click
Open.
8 In the Duplicate Types dialog, click OK.
A warning dialog displays, explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the
new project will be used.
Place an instance of the loaded group
9 In the Project Browser, expand Groups, and expand Model.

10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit, and click Create Instance.
11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.
13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.
Saving and Loading Groups | 757

Convert group instance to a linked file
14 Select the group, and on the Options Bar, click Link.

15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog, click Use Existing.
When a group is converted to a link, either the selected group can be used to make a new linked
file, or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.
16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_2 Bedroom
Unit-Alternate.rvt.
18 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links.

The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.rvt file is added as a link to the project.
Convert the linked model to a group
19 In the drawing area, select the linked Revit model.

20 On the Options Bar, click Bind.
21 In the Bind Link Options dialog, verify that Attached Details is selected only, and click OK.
22 In the Duplicate Types dialog, click OK.
23 In the confirmation dialog, click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the
alternate Typical Kitchen group.
24 In the message dialog, click Remove Link.
This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project,
but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. You can remove the linked file from
the project by clicking Remove Link, or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links
dialog.
25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project, and the link is removed.
26 Close the file with or without saving it.

Metric Tutorials - Autodesk

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Metric Tutorials - Autodesk

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Metric Tutorials - Autodesk

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revit Structure 2009

Third Party Software Program Credits

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Chapter 8 Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 9 Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Chapter 12 Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Chapter 13 Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Chapter 18 Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Chapter 21 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Chapter 23 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Chapter 24 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

■ how Revit Structure works.

Using the Tutorials

Accessing Training Files

Where are the training files located?

What is a training file?

Open a training file

1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

■ For File name, enter the new file name.

Create a project from a template

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project.

Accessing Training Files | 3

12 Select Structural Analysis-DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open.

Understanding the Basics

What is Autodesk Revit Structure 2009?

What is meant by parametric?

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?

A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

Element behavior in a parametric modeler

In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

There are 2 types of model elements:

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Understanding the Basics | 5

■ System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface

Start a new project

1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

The Title Bar

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7

The Menu Bar

3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.